GX Works2 (Simpled Project)

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 208

Mitsubishi Programmable Controllers

Training Manual
CC-Link (for GX Works3)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Always read these instructions before using the products.)

When designing the system, always read the relevant manuals and give sufficient consideration to safety.
During the exercise, pay full attention to the following points and handle the product correctly.

[EXERCISE PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Do not touch the terminals while the power is on to prevent electric shock.
● Before opening the safety cover, power off the system or ensure the safety.
● Do not touch the movable portion.

CAUTION
● Follow the instructor's directions during the exercise.
● Do not remove the module of the demonstration machine or change wirings without permission.
Doing so may cause failures, malfunctions, personal injuries and/or a fire.
● Power off the system before mounting or removing the module.
Failure to do so may result in malfunctions of the module or electric shock.
● When the demonstration machine (such as X/Y table) emits abnormal odor/sound, press the "Power
switch" or "Emergency switch" to turn off.
● When a problem occurs, notify the instructor as soon as possible.

A-1
MEMO

A-2
REVISIONS
*The text number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Revision date *Manual number Description
November 2017 SH(NA)-081676ENG-A First edition

This manual confers no industrial property rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held
responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

 2017 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

A-3
TRADEMARKS
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. in Japan.
Microsoft, Microsoft Access, Excel, SQL Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual Studio, Windows, Windows NT, Windows
Server, Windows Vista, and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.

A-4
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1
REVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 3
TRADEMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 4
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 9
RELEVANT MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 9
ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 10

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1-1
1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
1.2 CC-Link System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6

CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS 2-1


2.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
2.1.1 Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
2.1.2 I/O signals of the master/local module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
2.1.3 Buffer memory of the master/local module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8
2.1.4 Parameter information area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
2.2 Operation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
2.2.1 Required settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
2.2.2 Setting network parameters and link refresh parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 14

CHAPTER 3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1) 3-1


3.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
3.2 Setting Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
3.2.1 Part names of the master/local module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
3.2.2 Setting parameters of the master/local module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5
3.2.3 Part names and settings of the remote I/O module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8
3.3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
3.3.1 Connecting CC-Link dedicated cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
3.3.2 Connecting 24V power supply cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
3.4.1 Starting GX Works3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
3.4.2 Adding master/local module data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
3.4.3 Parameter settings (master station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18
3.4.4 Parameter settings (intelligent function module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
3.4.5 Specifying a connection destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
3.4.6 Writing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
3.5 Module Unit Test (Hardware Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27
3.6 Line Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28
3.7 Monitoring/Test of the Remote I/O Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 29
3.8 Creating a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 31
3.9 Communications with the Remote I/O Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35

CHAPTER 4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2) 4-1


4.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
4.2 Setting and Connecting Remote Device Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
4.2.1 Setting modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
4.2.2 Connecting modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3

A-5
4.3 Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
4.3.1 Parameter settings (master station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
4.3.2 Initial procedure registration of the remote device stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
4.4 Monitoring and Test of the Remote Device Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
4.5 Creating a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
4.6 Communications with the Remote Device Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21

CHAPTER 5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3) 5-1


5.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
5.2 Connecting Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
5.3 Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3
5.3.1 Parameter settings (master station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3
5.3.2 Parameter settings (local station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
5.4 Creating a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
5.4.1 Master station side sequence program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
5.4.2 Local station side sequence program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
5.5 Communications Between the Master Station and Local Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18

CHAPTER 6 EXERCISE 4 (REMOTE I/O NET MODE) 6-1


6.1 Features of Remote I/O Net Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
6.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
6.3 Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
6.3.1 Parameter settings (master station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
6.4 Creating a Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5
6.5 Communications in Remote I/O Net Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8

APPENDICES App. - 1
Appendix 1 Specifications of CC-Link Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 1
Appendix 1.1 Maximum overall cable length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 1
Appendix 1.2 Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 1
Appendix 2 Buffer Memory Assignment of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 2
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 7
Appendix 3.1 List of link special relay (SB) areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 7
Appendix 3.2 List of link special register (SW) areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 13
Appendix 3.3 List of error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 23
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 34
Appendix 4.1 RIRD (Reading data from the target station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 35
Appendix 4.2 RIWT (Writing data to the target station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 39
Appendix 4.3 RIRCV (Reading data from the buffer memory of the specified intelligent device station) . . . App. - 43
Appendix 4.4 RISEND (Writing data to the buffer memory of the specified intelligent device station) . . . . . App. - 46
Appendix 4.5 RIFR (Reading data from the automatic update buffer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 49
Appendix 4.6 RITO (Writing data to the automatic update buffer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 51
Appendix 4.7 RDMSG (Performing a message transmission to a remote device station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 53
Appendix 4.8 RLPASET (Setting network parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 59
Appendix 5 Precautions for Creating Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 64
Appendix 6 List of I/O Signals and Remote Register Assignment of the AJ65BT-64AD. . . . . . . . . . . App. - 65
Appendix 7 List of I/O Signals and Remote Register Assignment of the AJ65BT-64DAV . . . . . . . . . App. - 67
Appendix 8 List of I/O Signals and Remote Register Assignment of the FR-E520-0.1KN . . . . . . . . . App. - 69
Appendix 9 Exercise 5 (Connecting an Inverter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 71
Appendix 9.1 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 71

A-6
Appendix 9.2 Setting and connecting the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 72
Appendix 9.3 Parameter settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 73
Appendix 9.4 Setting parameters of the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 75
Appendix 9.5 Creating a sequence program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 76
Appendix 9.6 Communications with the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 82
Appendix 10 Standby Master Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App. - 83

CONTENTS

A-7
MEMO

A-8
INTRODUCTION
This school textbook helps you to easily understand a CC-Link system using MELSEC iQ-R series modules.
For a good understanding of the CC-Link system features, this textbook describes GX Works3, a basic system in which
remote I/O modules or remote device modules are connected, and an application system in which an inverter is connected.

RELEVANT MANUALS
Manual name [manual number] Description Available
form
MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Startup) Procedures, system configuration, and wiring required for e-Manual
[SH-081269ENG] using the MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link system master/local PDF
module
MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application) Functions, programming, and troubleshooting required for e-Manual
[SH-081270ENG] using the MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link system master/local PDF
module
GX Works3 Operating Manual System configuration of GX Works3, parameter settings, and e-Manual
[SH-081215ENG] operation method of the online function PDF
Digital-Analog Converter Module type AJ65BT-64DAV/DAI User's Manual Specifications and handling of the AJ65BT-64DAV/DAI PDF
[SH-3615] digital-analog converter module
AJ65BT-64AD Analog-Digital Converter Module User's Manual Specifications, handling, and programming method of the PDF
[SH-3614] AJ65BT-64AD analog-digital converter module
FR-E500(CC-Link) INSTRUCTION MANUAL Handling and precautions for using the FREQROL-E500 PDF
[IB-66864] series (CC-Link type) general purpose inverter

e-Manual refers to the Mitsubishi FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool.
e-Manual has the following features:
• Required information can be cross-searched in multiple manuals.
• Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual.
• The hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product figures.
• Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked.

A-9
ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS
The following table lists the abbreviations and terms used in this textbook.
Abbreviations and terms Description
Buffer memory A memory in an intelligent function module, where data (such as setting values and monitoring values) is stored.
When using the CPU module, the memory is indicated for storing data (such as setting values and monitored
values) of the Ethernet function and data used for data communications of the multiple CPU function.
CPU module A generic term for the MELSEC iQ-R series CPU module
Cyclic transmission A function by which data is periodically exchanged between the master station and other stations on the same
system using link devices
Data link A generic term for cyclic transmission and transient transmission
Dedicated instruction An instruction for using functions of the module
Device A device (X, Y, M, D, or others) in a CPU module
Disconnection A process of stopping data link if a data link error occurs
Engineering tool Another term for the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers
Global label A label that is enabled for all program data when multiple program data is created in the project.
There are two types of global labels: module labels that are automatically generated by GX Works3 and labels that
can be created for any of the specified devices.
Intelligent device station A station that exchanges I/O signals (bit data) and I/O data (word data) with another station by cyclic transmission.
This station responds to a transient transmission request from another station and also issues a transient
transmission request to another station.
Intelligent function module A module that has functions other than input and output, such as an A/D converter module and D/A converter
module
Label A label that represents a device in a given character string
Link device A device (RX, RY, RWr, RWw, SB, or SW) in a CC-Link module
Link scan (link scan time) Time required for all stations in a system to transmit data.
The link scan time depends on data volume and the number of transient transmission requests.
Link special register (SW) Word data that indicates the operating status and data link status of modules on the master and local stations
Link special relay (SB) Bit data that indicates the operating status and data link status of modules on the master and local stations
Local station A station that performs cyclic transmission and transient transmission with the master station and other local
stations
Master station A station that controls the entire system. This station can perform cyclic transmission and transient transmission
with all stations. Only one master station can be used in a system.
Master/local module The abbreviation for the RJ61BT11 CC-Link system master/local module
Message transmission A function to communicate data between a master station and slave stations when the model names of slave
stations are read or the dedicated instructions are requested
Module label A label that represents one of memory areas (I/O signals and buffer memory areas) specific to each module in a
given character string.
GX Works3 automatically generates this label, which can be used as a global label.
RAS The abbreviation for Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability.
This term refers to the overall usability of automated equipment.
RDMSG A generic term for the G.RDMSG and GP.RDMSG
Remote device net mode A generic term for the remote device net Ver.1 mode and remote device net Ver.2 mode
Remote device net Ver.1 mode A mode used to configure a system only with a master station and Ver.1-compatible remote stations
Remote device net Ver.2 mode A mode used to configure a system only with a master station and remote stations including Ver.2-compatible slave
stations or to add Ver.2-compatible slave stations in future (a system only with a master station and Ver.1-
compatible remote stations).
Remote device station A station that exchanges I/O signals (bit data) and I/O data (word data) with the master station by cyclic
transmission.
This station cannot perform transient transmission.
Remote I/O net mode A mode used to perform high-speed communications in a system consisting of a master station and remote I/O
station(s) only
Remote I/O station A station that exchanges I/O signals (bit data) with the master station by cyclic transmission. This station cannot
perform transient transmission.
Remote input (RX) Bit data input from a slave station to the master station (For some areas in a local station, data is output in the
opposite direction.)
Remote net mode A mode used to communicate data with all stations (remote I/O station, remote device station, local station,
intelligent device station, and standby master station) in a CC-Link system.
There are two modes: remote net Ver.1 mode and remote net Ver.2 mode.

A - 10
Abbreviations and terms Description
Remote net Ver.1 mode A mode used to configure a system only with a master station and Ver.1-compatible slave stations.
Data can be communicated with all stations (remote I/O station, remote device station, local station, intelligent
device station, and standby master station) in a CC-Link system.
Remote net Ver.2 mode A mode used to configure a system containing a master station and Ver.2-compatible slave stations or to add Ver.2-
compatible slave stations in future.
Data can be communicated with all stations (remote I/O station, remote device station, local station, intelligent
device station, and standby master station) in a CC-Link system.
Compared to the remote net Ver.1 mode, the number of cyclic points per station is increased from 128 to 896 for
RX/RY, and from 16 to 128 for RWr/RWw.
Remote output (RY) Bit data output from the master station to a slave station (For some areas in a local station, data is output in the
opposite direction.)
Remote register (RWr) Word data input from a slave station to the master station (For some areas in a local station, data is output in the
opposite direction.)
Remote register (RWw) Word data output from the master station to a slave station (For some areas in a local station, data is output in the
opposite direction.)
Remote station A generic term for a remote I/O station and a remote device station
Return A process of restarting data link when a station recovers from an error
RIFR A generic term for the G.RIFR and GP.RIFR
RIRCV A generic term for the G.RIRCV and GP.RIRCV
RIRD A generic term for the G.RIRD and GP.RIRD
RISEND A generic term for the G.RISEND and GP.RISEND
RITO A generic term for the G.RITO and GP.RITO
RIWT A generic term for the G.RIWT and GP.RIWT
RLPASET A generic term for the G.RLPASET and GP.RLPASET
Slave station A generic term for a remote I/O station, remote device station, local station, intelligent device station, and standby
master station
Transient transmission A function of communications with another station, which is used when requested by a dedicated instruction or the
engineering tool
Ver.1-compatible slave station A slave station that supports the remote net Ver.1 mode or remote device net Ver.1 mode
Ver.2-compatible slave station A slave station that supports the remote net Ver.2 mode or remote device net Ver.2 mode

A - 11
MEMO

A - 12
1 OVERVIEW
1
CC-Link (Control & Communication Link) is a network suitable for configuring a distributed system enabling wiring and cost
reduction.
This chapter describes the features of CC-Link and how the CC-Link system operates.

1.1 Features
(1) Reduced wiring and space by distributed control
Since modules can be installed to devices and equipment such as conveyor lines and machinery by using the bus
network for distributed control, the wiring of the entire system can be reduced. In addition, the distributed control enables
an efficient installation of modules, resulting in reduced space.

Machinery Machinery

Remote station Remote station

Master station
CC-Link dedicated cable

Machinery Machinery

(2) Connecting intelligent devices


Transient transmission is available besides cyclic transmission of bit/word data. Thus, data communications with
intelligent devices, such as an HMI, or a personal computer is allowed.

(3) Reliable open field network


Since the network technique is disclosed, many domestic and foreign manufacturers have developed extensive CC-Link-
compatible products. Thus, a reliable open field network system can be configured using the most appropriate field
devices selected from these many choices.

1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Features 1-1
(4) Configuring systems meeting needs
(a) Transmission distance
The overall cable distance varies depending on the transmission speed. It ranges from 100m (at 10Mbps) to 1.2km
(at 156kbps).
(b) Number of connectable stations
Up to 64 stations (remote I/O station, remote device station, and local station) can be connected to one master
station.
In remote net Ver.1 mode, the maximum number of stations is 64 for remote I/O stations, 42 for remote device
stations, and 26 for local stations.

(5) Number of link points


The number of link points per system is 2048 for the remote input (RX), 2048 for the remote output (RY), 256 for the
remote register (RWr), and 256 for the remote register (RWw).
In CC-Link Ver.1 mode, the number of link points per occupied remote or local station is 32 for the remote input (RX), 32
for the remote output (RY), 4 for the remote register (RWr), and 4 for the remote register (RWw).

(6) Preventing a system failure (slave station cutoff function)


Since a bus network is employed, data communications with normal modules continue even if a module goes down due
to power-off or other causes.
A module with a two-piece terminal block can be replaced during data link. (Power off the module to be replaced before
removal.)
Note that if a cable is disconnected, data link fails among all stations.
Station No.4 Station No.7

Local station Local station


Master
Station No.1 Station No.3 (1 station Station No.5 (4 stations
station
occupied) occupied)
Remote station Remote station Remote station
(2 stations (1 station (2 stations
occupied) occupied) occupied)

Data link continues.

Station No.4 Station No.7


Faulty
station
Local station Local station
Master
(1 station (4 stations
station Station No.1 Station No.3 Station No.5
occupied) occupied)
Remote station Remote station Remote station
(2 stations (1 station (2 stations
occupied) occupied) occupied)

(7) Automatic return function


When a module which was disconnected due to power-off or other causes recovers, it automatically returns to the
system.

(8) Setting the data link status when an error occurs in the CPU module of the master station
The data link status (stop or continue) when an operation stop error such as SP.UNIT ERROR occurs in the CPU module
of the master station can be set.
When an operation continuation error such as BATTERY ERROR occurs, data link continues regardless of the setting.

(9) Setting the status of data input from a data link faulty station
Data input (received) from a data link faulty station can be cleared or held. (The data just before the error has occurred
can be held.)

1 OVERVIEW
1-2 1.1 Features
(10) Standby master function
If the master station goes down due to an error in the CPU module or power supply, data link can be continued by
switching the control to the standby master station (a backup station for the master station). This function is used not to 1
stop the entire system even if the master station goes down.
The master station controls data link.

Remote device station Intelligent device station Standby master station


Master station (station No.: 2, number of (station No.: 4, number of (station No.: 1, number of
Controlling occupied stations: 2) occupied stations: 1) occupied stations: 1)
Standby status

Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission

The master station is down. → The standby master station controls data link.
Remote device station Intelligent device station Standby master station
(station No.: 2, number of (station No.: 4, number of (station No.: 1 → 0*1)
Master station occupied stations: 2) occupied stations: 1) Controlling

Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission

The master station in the normal state returns to the system. → The master station is on standby in case of a standby master station failure.

Master station Remote device station Intelligent device station Standby master station
(station No.: 0 → 1*2, number of (station No.: 2, number of (station No.: 4, number of (station No.: 0)
occupied stations: 1) occupied stations: 2) occupied stations: 1) Controlling
Standby status

Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission

An error has occurred in the standby master station. → The master station controls data link.
Master station Remote device station Intelligent device station
(station No.: 1 → 0) (station No.: 2, number of (station No.: 4, number of
Controlling occupied stations: 2) occupied stations: 1) Standby master station

Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission

The standby master station in the normal state returns to the system. → The standby master station is on standby in case of a master station failure.

Remote device station Intelligent device station Standby master station


(station No.: 2, number of (station No.: 1, number of
Master station (station No.: 4, number of
occupied stations: 2) occupied stations: 1)
Controlling occupied stations: 1)
Standby status

Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission Cyclic transmission

*1 The dot matrix LED displays the station number set in the module instead of "0". The MST LED turns on and the S MST LED turns off.
*2 When the master station returns to the system, it operates with the station number of the standby master station, but the dot matrix
LED displays the station number set in the module ("0" for the master station). The MST LED turns off and the S MST LED turns on.

1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Features 1-3
(11) Remote device station initialization procedure registration function
This function is used for initial settings of remote device stations by using GX Works3 without creating a sequence
program.

(12) Event issuance for the interrupt program


This function issues an event when the condition that has been set by using GX Works3 is satisfied and allow a CPU
module to execute the interrupt program.

(13) Selecting a mode according to the system used


Select a mode according to the system used for the master/local module. Depending on the mode, the addresses of
storage positions for RX, RY, RWr, and RWw differ.

Mode Description Connectable slave station


Remote net Ver.1 mode Configures a new system (only with Ver.1-compatible slave stations). Ver.1-compatible slave station
Remote net Ver.2 mode • Configures a system including Ver.2-compatible slave stations. Ver.1-compatible slave station and
• Uses more points compared to the remote net Ver.1 mode. Ver.2-compatible slave station
Remote device net Ver.1 mode*1 • Configures a system only with Ver.1-compatible remote stations. Ver.1-compatible remote station
• Uses more remote device stations compared to the remote net Ver.1
mode.
Remote device net Ver.2 mode*1 • Configures a system only with remote stations including Ver.2-compatible Ver.1-compatible remote station and
remote stations. Ver.2-compatible remote station
• Uses more remote device stations compared to the remote net Ver.2
mode.
Remote I/O net mode*1 Configures a system only with remote I/O stations. Remote I/O station

*1 This mode cannot be selected when "Station Type" under "Required Settings" is set to something other than "Master Station".

(14) Reserved station function


This function prevents the stations that are not actually connected (but will be connected in future) from being handled as
faulty stations by setting them as reserved stations.
Stations that will be
connected in future

(Reserved station)
Station No.4

Local station (Reserved station)


Master (4 stations
Station No.1 Station No.3 Station No.8 Station No.10
station occupied)
Remote station Remote station Remote station Remote station
(2 stations (1 station (2 stations (1 station
occupied) occupied) occupied) occupied)

1 OVERVIEW
1-4 1.1 Features
(15) Error invalid station setting function
This function prevents the module that is powered off from being handled as a data link faulty station by the master
station and local stations by setting the network parameters. 1
Note that errors are no longer detected.
Stations set as error invalid stations

Station No.4 Station No.7

Local station Local station


Master (4 stations (4 stations
station Station No.1 Station No.3 Station No.5
occupied) occupied)
Remote station Remote station Remote station
(2 stations (1 station (2 stations
occupied) occupied) occupied)

The station does not become a data link


faulty station.
Station No.4 Station No.7

Local station Local station


Master
Station No.3 (1 station (4 stations
station Station No.1 Station No.5
occupied) occupied)
Remote station Remote station Remote station
(2 stations (1 station (2 stations
occupied) occupied) occupied)

(16) Scan synchronous function


This function synchronizes a link scan with a sequence scan.

(17) Temporary error invalid station setting function


This function prevents the module specified with GX Works3 from being handled as a data link faulty station by the
master station and local stations during online.
Modules can be replaced during online without an error being detected.

(18) Data link stop/restart


While data link is performed, it can be stopped or restarted.

(19) Station number overlap checking function


This function checks the status of connected stations and checks that occupied station numbers do not overlap and the
station number 0 is not set to multiple stations in the system.

1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Features 1-5
1.2 CC-Link System Operation
This section describes the basic configuration of the CC-Link system and how the system operates.

(1) Basic CC-Link system example


HMI/Operation terminal
Master station Local station
• Inverter
• Servo
• Sensor
and others

Terminating
resistor
Terminating
resistor

Remote I/O station Remote device station Intelligent device station


(I/O module) • A/D converter module • Positioning module
• D/A converter module • RS-232 interface module
• High-speed counter module or other modules
• Temperature input module
or other modules

(2) Station types


The stations used in the CC-Link system are classified broadly into four types.
• Master station
This station has the master/local module on the base unit and manages/controls the entire CC-Link system.
• Local station
This station has the master/local module on the base unit and communicates with the master station or other local
stations. The model of the master/local module is the same as that of the master station. (Selection of master/local
station depends on the network parameter setting.)
• Remote station
I/O modules and special function modules are classified into this type. They actually input/output data.
Other devices such as an inverter, HMI, and sensor are also included in this type. The remote stations are further
classified into the remote I/O station (equivalent to the I/O module) and the remote device station (equivalent to the
special function module, such as an inverter, HMI, and sensor).
• Intelligent device station
This station is used for data communications with transient transmission (message transmission). Positioning modules
and HMIs are classified into this type.

1 OVERVIEW
1-6 1.2 CC-Link System Operation
(3) Basic communication flow in the CC-Link system (Master station  Remote I/O station)
Only on/off information (remote input RX and remote output RY) is communicated.
CPU module Master module Remote I/O station (input) 1
Remote input (on/off data) External input
On/off information is
read by auto refresh. Buffer memory
RX0F to 0
0101010101010101
CPU device for RX
0101010101010101
(such as X/M) Area for RX RX1F to 10

Remote I/O station (output)

Remote output (on/off data) External output


On/off information is
written by auto refresh. RY0F to 0
1010101010101010
CPU device for RY
1010101010101010
(such as Y/M) Area for RY RY1F to 10

Refresh

Between CPU device Data link over CC-Link


areas and buffer
memory areas of the
master module

 Signals are input from the external device to the remote I/O station.
 The remote input signals (on/off) of the remote I/O station are stored in the buffer memory (areas for remote input
signals) of the master module by data link.
 The remote input signal information of the remote I/O station is read from the buffer memory (areas for remote input
signals) of the master module to the CPU module by auto refresh. (This information is used for operations as device
data of the CPU module.)
 The operation result is written from the CPU module to the buffer memory (areas for remote output signals) of the
master module by auto refresh.
 The on/off information in the buffer memory (areas for remote output signals) of the master module is stored as the
remote output signals of the remote I/O station by data link.
 Signals are output from the remote I/O station to the external device.

In the "Data link over CC-Link" part of the figure above, the master module operates according to the set
condition.
In "Refresh (Between CPU device areas and buffer memory areas of the master module)", the CPU module
operates according to the link refresh parameters.
As shown in the figure above, the remote device can be used like the CPU device.
Note) The refresh method varies depending on the CPU module type.

1 OVERVIEW
1.2 CC-Link System Operation 1-7
(4) Basic communication flow in the CC-Link system (Master station  Remote device station)
On/off information (remote input RX and remote output RY) and numerical value data (remote register) are
communicated.
CPU module Master module Remote device station

On/off information is
read by auto refresh. Buffer memory RX0F to 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Remote input
CPU device for RX
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 (on/off data)
(such as X/M) Area for RX RX1F to 10
On/off information is
written by auto refresh. RY0F to 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Remote output
CPU device for RY
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 (on/off data)
(such as Y/M) Area for RY RY1F to 10
Numerical value data is
written by auto refresh.
Word data (RWw0)
Word data
CPU device for
Remote register
RWw to
(numerical value data)
Word data
Word data (RWw3)
(such as D/W) Area for RWw
Numerical value data is
read by auto refresh.
Word data (RWr0)
Word data
CPU device for Remote register
RWr to
(numerical value data)
Word data
Word data (RWr3)
(such as D/W) Area for RWr

Refresh

Between CPU device Data link over CC-Link


areas and buffer
memory areas of the
master module

 The remote input signals (on/off) of the remote device station are stored in the buffer memory (areas for remote input
signals) of the master module by data link.
 The remote input signal information of the remote device station is read from the buffer memory (areas for remote
input signals) of the master module to the CPU module by auto refresh. (This information is used for operations as
device data of the CPU module.)
 The operation result is written from the CPU module to the buffer memory (areas for remote output signals) of the
master module by auto refresh.
 The on/off information in the buffer memory (areas for remote output signals) of the master module is stored as the
remote output signals of the remote device station by data link.
 The numerical value data is written from the CPU module to the buffer memory (areas for sending to the remote
register) of the master module by auto refresh.
 The numerical value data in the buffer memory (areas for sending to the remote register) of the master module is
written to the remote register of the remote device station by data link.
 The remote register (numerical value data) of the remote device station is stored in the buffer memory (areas for
receiving from the remote register) of the master module by data link.
 The numerical value data of the remote device station is read from the buffer memory (areas for receiving from the
remote register) of the master module to the CPU module by auto refresh.

1 OVERVIEW
1-8 1.2 CC-Link System Operation
(5) Basic communication flow in the CC-Link system (Master station  Local station)
Bit information (remote input RX and remote output RY) and word information (remote register) is communicated
between CPU modules on an N-to-N (N:N) basis. 1
Remote I/O station Remote device station Local station Local station
Master station (station No.1) (station No.2) (station No.3) (station No.4)

Remote input (RX) Remote output (RY) Remote output (RY)


Station No.1 Remote input (RX) Station No.1 Station No.1
Station No.2 Remote input (RX) Station No.2 Station No.2
Station No.3 Station No.3 Station No.3
Station No.4 Station No.4 Station No.4

Remote output (RY) Remote input (RX) Remote input (RX)


Station No.1 Remote output (RY) Station No.1 Station No.1
Station No.2 Remote output (RY) Station No.2 Station No.2
Station No.3 Station No.3 Station No.3
Station No.4 Station No.4 Station No.4

Remote register Remote register Remote register


(RWw) (RWr) (RWr)
Station No.1 Station No.1 Station No.1
Remote register
Station No.2 (RWw) Station No.2 Station No.2
Station No.3 Station No.3 Station No.3
Station No.4 Station No.4 Station No.4

Remote register Remote register Remote register


(RWr) (RWw) (RWw)
Station No.1 Station No.1 Station No.1
Remote register
Station No.2 (RWr) Station No.2 Station No.2
Station No.3 Station No.3 Station No.3
Station No.4 Station No.4 Station No.4

Since the master station and local stations have a CPU module independently, data in RY of the own station is sent to
RX of the destination station in communications between the master station and a local station, as shown below.
The operation differs as that of the communications between the master station and remote station.

Master station Master station

Output (RY) Input (RX) Output (RY) Input (RX)

Input (RX) Output (RY) Output (RY) Input (RX)

Local station Remote station

The operation is the same as that for the remote registers RWw and RWr.

1 OVERVIEW
1.2 CC-Link System Operation 1-9
MEMO

1 OVERVIEW
1 - 10 1.2 CC-Link System Operation
2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS
This chapter describes the specifications and operation settings of CC-Link for the MELSEC iQ-R series.
For details, refer to the following.
 MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Startup) 2

2.1 Specifications

2.1.1 Performance specifications


The following table lists the performance specifications of the master/local module.
Item Description
Transmission speed Selected from 156kbps, 625kbps, 2.5Mbps, 5Mbps, and 10Mbps.
Maximum number of connectable modules 64
(master station)
Number of occupied stations (local station) 1 to 4 stations (The number of stations can be changed using the engineering tool.)
Maximum number CC-Link Ver.1 • Remote I/O (RX, RY): 2048 points
of link points per • Remote register (RWw): 256 points (master station  remote device station/local station/intelligent device
system station/standby master station)
• Remote register (RWr): 256 points (remote device station/local station/intelligent device station/standby master
station  master station)
CC-Link Ver.2 • Remote I/O (RX, RY): 8192 points
• Remote register (RWw): 2048 points (master station  remote device station/local station/intelligent device
station/standby master station)
• Remote register (RWr): 2048 points (remote device station/local station/intelligent device station/standby
master station  master station)
Number of link points per remote station/ Page 2 - 2 Number of link points by the number of occupied stations
local station/intelligent device station/
standby master station
Communication method Broadcast polling method
Synchronization method Frame synchronization method
Encoding method NRZI method
Network topology Bus (RS-485)
Transmission format HDLC compliant
Error control system CRC (X16 + X12 + X5 + 1)
Connection cable Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cable
Maximum overall cable length (maximum Depends on the transmission speed ( Page App. - 1 Specifications of CC-Link Cables)
transmission distance)
RAS function • Standby master function
• Automatic return function
• Slave station cutoff function
• Error detection using link special relay areas (SB) and link special register areas (SW)
Number of occupied I/O points 32 points
Internal current consumption (5VDC) 0.34A
Weight 0.16kg

2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS


2.1 Specifications 2-1
Number of link points by the number of occupied stations
The following table lists the number of link points by the number of occupied stations.
Item CC-Link Ver.1 CC-Link Ver.2
Extended cyclic setting
Single Double Quadruple Octuple
Number of link 1 station Remote I/O 32 points (30 32 points (30 32 points (30 64 points (62 128 points (126
points by the occupied (RX, RY) points for a local points for a local points for a local points for a local points for a local
number of station) station) station) station) station)
occupied Remote register 4 points 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points
stations (RWw)
Remote register 4 points 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points
(RWr)
2 stations Remote I/O 64 points (62 64 points (62 96 points (94 192 points (190 384 points (382
occupied (RX, RY) points for a local points for a local points for a local points for a local points for a local
station) station) station) station) station)
Remote register 8 points 8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points
(RWw)
Remote register 8 points 8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points
(RWr)
3 stations Remote I/O 96 points (94 96 points (94 160 points (158 320 points (318 640 points (638
occupied (RX, RY) points for a local points for a local points for a local points for a local points for a local
station) station) station) station) station)
Remote register 12 points 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points
(RWw)
Remote register 12 points 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points
(RWr)
4 stations Remote I/O 128 points (126 128 points (126 224 points (222 448 points (446 896 points (894
occupied (RX, RY) points for a local points for a local points for a local points for a local points for a local
station) station) station) station) station)
Remote register 16 points 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points
(RWw)
Remote register 16 points 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points
(RWr)

Number of occupied stations, station numbers, and numbers of modules and stations
The following describes how the number of occupied stations, station numbers, and the numbers of modules and stations are
related.
(1) Number of occupied stations
The number of occupied remote I/O stations, remote device stations, and local stations are fixed for each module.
However, the number of occupied local stations can be set (1 to 4 stations).
Module Number of occupied stations
Remote I/O station (8-point, 16-point, and 32-point 1 station
module)
Remote device station AJ65BT-64AD 2 stations
AJ65BT-64DAV 2 stations
AJ65BT-64DAI 2 stations
AJ65BT-D62 4 stations
AJ65BT-D62D(S1)
AJ65BT-68TD 4 stations
AJ65BT-64RD3 4 stations
AJ65BT-64RD4
Local station RJ61BT11 1 to 4 stations (The number of stations
can be changed in the parameter
settings.)
Intelligent device station AJ65BT-R2N 1 station
AJ65BT-D75P2-S3 4 stations
GT15-J61BT13 1 or 4 stations

2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS


2-2 2.1 Specifications
(2) Station number
When the number of occupied stations of all the connected stations is 1, set serial numbers from 1 (such as 1, 2, 3...) as
station numbers.
However, when a station that occupies two or more stations is connected, set station numbers considering the number of
occupied stations.

Station No.1 Station No.2 Station No.3 Station No.4 Station No.5 Station No.6 Station No.7 Station No.8 Station No.9 2

Station No.4 Station No.9

Local station Local station


Master
Station No.1 Station No.3 (4 stations Station No.8 (1 station
station occupied) occupied)
Remote station Remote station Remote station
(2 stations (1 station (1 station
occupied) occupied) occupied)

(3) Numbers of modules and stations


The number of modules is the number of modules actually connected.
The number of stations is the total number of stations occupied by the modules listed in (1).
In the system configuration example in (2), the number of modules is 5 and the number of stations is 9.

Precautions for system configuration


To prevent incorrect inputs from remote stations, observe the following when designing the system.

(1) When powering on and off the system


Power on the remote station, and start data link. In addition, stop data link before powering off the remote station. Failure
to do so may cause an incorrect input.

Data link starts. Data link stops.


During
Master station execution
(data link status)
Stopped

ON
Remote station
(power supply status)
OFF

2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS


2.1 Specifications 2-3
(2) Upon a momentary power failure of a remote station
If a momentary power failure occurs in the power supply (24VDC) of the remote station, an incorrect input may occur.
(a) Cause of an incorrect input due to a momentary power failure
The hardware of a remote station internally converts the module power supply (24VDC) into 5VDC. If a momentary
power failure occurs at a remote station, (the time until the 5VDC power supply in the remote station turns off) > (the
response time after an input module turns on and off); therefore, refreshing data within the time as shown in 
below causes an incorrect input.

Remote station
(module power supply and input
external power supply)

Remote station
(internal 5VDC)

Input (Xn)

Turning off the input external power supply turns off an input (Xn) after the response time
between the input module turning on and it turning off.

(b) Countermeasure against an incorrect input


Supply power to the power supply module, stabilized power supply, and AC input external power supply from the
same power supply.
DC input
Master module
Power supply

CPU
module

module
Remote I/O module

Module power supply


Input external
Stabilized power supply
power supply 24VDC

AC input
Master module
Power supply

CPU
module

module
Remote I/O module

Module power supply


Input external
Stabilized power supply
power supply 24VDC

2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS


2-4 2.1 Specifications
When supplying power to multiple remote stations from one power supply, select applicable cables and
properly wire them to prevent a voltage drop caused by the power supply. When a remote station has a
receiving end voltage within the specified range for the remote station used, it can be connected.
Stabilized power
supply
2

Remote module Remote module

(c) Access to a station with the station number 64


• Access to a local station with the station number 64 cannot be performed from other stations with GX Works3 and
GOTs.
Changing the station number to the one other than 64 allows access from other stations.
• Access to a local station and intelligent device station with the station number 64 cannot be performed from other
stations with the CC-Link board.
Changing the station number to the one other than 64 allows access from other stations.

2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS


2.1 Specifications 2-5
2.1.2 I/O signals of the master/local module
This section describes the I/O signals for the CPU module. The I/O signal assignment of when the start I/O number of the
master/local module is "0" is listed below.

List of I/O signals


The following table lists I/O signals. The device X is an input signal from the master/local module to the CPU module. The
device Y is an output signal from the CPU module to the master/local module.

■Input signals
Device No. Signal name
X0 Module failure
X1 Own station data link status
X2 Use prohibited
X3 Data link status of other stations
X4 to XE Use prohibited
XF Module ready
X10 to X1F Use prohibited

■Output signals
Device No. Signal name
Y0 to Y1F Use prohibited

Do not use (turn on) any "use prohibited" signals as an input or output signal to the CPU module.
Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system.

Details of I/O signals


The following describes on/off timing and conditions of I/O signals.

■Module failure: X0
This signal indicates whether the module is normal or faulty.
Off: Module normal
On: Module failure
Module failure
(X0)

Module ready
(XF)

■Own station data link status: X1


This signal indicates the data link status of the own station.
'Operation status of own station' (SB006E) has the same functionality. Use either of X1 or 'Operation status of own station'
(SB006E) for programming.
Note that the on/off conditions of X1 are the opposite to those of 'Operation status of own station' (SB006E). The conditions of
X1 are as follows:
Off: Data link stop
On: Data link in progress

2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS


2-6 2.1 Specifications
■Data link status of other stations: X3
This signal indicates the data link status of other stations (remote station, local station, intelligent device station, and standby
master station).
'Data link status of other stations' (SB0080) has the same functionality. Use either of X3 or 'Data link status of other stations'
(SB0080) for programming.
Off: All stations normal 2
On: Faulty station found (The status of the faulty station is stored in 'Data link status of other stations' (SW0080 to SW0083).)

It takes maximum of six seconds for Data link status of other stations (X3) to turn on after a slave station
connected to the master station or local station becomes faulty. The time until this signal turns on differs
depending on the system configuration and error status.

■Module ready: XF
This signal indicates whether the module is ready for operation. When the module becomes ready, this signal turns on.
When the module is in the following state, this signal turns off.
• When Module failure (X0) turns on
Power-on

Module ready
(XF)

Module failure
(X0)

2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS


2.1 Specifications 2-7
2.1.3 Buffer memory of the master/local module
The buffer memory is used to exchange data between the master/local module and the CPU module.
Buffer memory values are defaulted when the CPU module is reset or the system is powered off.
For details, refer to Page App. - 2 Buffer Memory Assignment of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw and the following.
 MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application)

List of buffer memory addresses


When a standby master station is used, refer to the respective columns under "Availability" in the table as explained below.
• When a standby master station is operating as a master station: "Master station" column
• When a standby master station is operating as a standby master station: "Local station" column
: Available, : Not available
Address Name Description Read/Write Availability
Hexadecimal Decimal Master Local
station station
0H to DFH 0 to 223 Parameter information Stores parameter settings. Read *1 
area
E0H to 15FH 224 to 351 Remote input (RX)*2 ■Master station Read  
Stores the data input from slave stations.
■Local station  
Stores the data input from the master
station.
160H to 1DFH 352 to 479 Remote output (RY)*2 ■Master station Read, write  
Stores the data output to slave stations.
■Local station  
Stores the data output to the master station.
Data input from other slave stations are also
stored.
1E0H to 2DFH 480 to 735 Remote register (RWw)*2 ■Master station Read, write  
Stores the data to be sent to slave stations.
■Local station  
Stores the data to be sent to the master
station and other salve stations. Data
received from other slave stations are also
stored.
2E0H to 3DFH 736 to 991 Remote register (RWr)*2 ■Master station Read  
Stores the data received from slave stations.
■Local station  
Stores the data received from the master
station.
3E0H to 5DFH 992 to 1503 Slave station offset, size Stores the offset and size of RX, RY, RWw, Read  
information (512 words) and RWr in each slave station.
5E0H to 5FFH 1504 to 1535 Link special relay (SB) Stores the data link status. Read, write  
(Data can be
600H to 7FFH 1536 to 2047 Link special register (SW) Stores the data link status.
written only to
areas with the
first 32
addresses.)
800H to 9FFH 2048 to 2559 System area    
A00H to FFFH 2560 to 4095 Random access buffer Stores any data and is used for transient Read, write  
transmission.
1000H to 4096 to 8191 System area    
1FFFH
2000H to 8192 to 12287 Automatic update buffer Stores data automatically updated when Read, write  
2FFFH transient transmission (communications
using the automatic update buffer) is
performed with an intelligent device station.
3000H to 12288 to System area    
3FFFH 16383

2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS


2-8 2.1 Specifications
Address Name Description Read/Write Availability
Hexadecimal Decimal Master Local
station station
4000H to 16384 to Ver.2-compatible remote ■Master station Read  
41FFH 16895 input (RX)*3 Stores the data input from slave stations.
■Local station  
Stores the data input from the master 2
station.
4200H to 16896 to Ver.2-compatible remote ■Master station Read, write  
43FFH 17407 output (RY)*3 Stores the data output to slave stations.
■Local station  
Stores the data output to the master station.
Data input from other slave stations are also
stored.
4400H to 17408 to Ver.2-compatible remote ■Master station Read, write  
4BFFH 19455 register (RWw)*3 Stores the data to be sent to slave stations.
■Local station  
Stores the data to be sent to the master
station and other salve stations. Data
received from other slave stations are also
stored.
4C00H to 19456 to Ver.2-compatible remote ■Master station Read  
53FFH 21503 register (RWr)*3 Stores the data received from slave stations.
■Local station  
Stores the data received from the master
station.
5400H to 21504 to System area    
5C7FH 23679
5C80H to 23680 to Remote device station Stores the execution progress of the remote Read  
5CBFH 23743 initialization procedure device station initial setting procedure
registration execution registration function.
individual information
5CC0H to 5CC0H to System area    
7FFFH 7FFFH

*1 Not available when a standby master station is controlling the system.


*2 This buffer memory area is used when the remote net Ver.1 mode, remote device net Ver.1 mode, or remote I/O net mode is selected.
*3 This buffer memory area is used when the remote net Ver.2 mode or remote device net Ver.2 mode is selected.

Do not write data to "System area".


Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system.

2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS


2.1 Specifications 2-9
2.1.4 Parameter information area
This area stores parameter settings.
Do not write data in this area. Doing so may cause an error.
Setting item Description
Number of connected stations Stores the number of slave stations (including a reserved station) connected to the master station.
Default: 64 (stations)
Range: 1 to 64 (stations)
Number of retries Stores the number of retries to a station where a communication failure has occurred.
Default: 3 (times)
Range: 1 to 7 (times)
Number of automatic return Stores the number of slave stations that return to system operation by one link scan.
stations Default: 1 (station)
Range: 1 to 10 (stations)
Standby master station Stores the standby master station number.
specification Default: 0 (0: No standby master station specified)
Range: 0 to 64 (0: No standby master station specified, 1 to 64: Station number of the corresponding station)
Data link setting when CPU is Stores the specified data link status if a CPU module error occurs in the mater station.
down Default: 0 (Data link stopped)
Range: 0 (Data link stopped), 1 (Data link continued)
Scan mode setting Stores whether to synchronize a link scan with a sequence scan.
Default: 0 (Asynchronous with a sequence scan)
Range: 0 (Asynchronous with a sequence scan), 1 (Synchronous with a sequence scan)
Reserved station setting Stores the reserved station specification status. Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on.
Default: 0 (Not set)
Range: The bit corresponding to the station number turns on.
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
10H (16) 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

11H (17) 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

12H (18) 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

13H (19) 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49

1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

Error invalid station setting Stores the error invalid station specification status. Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on.
Default: 0 (Not set)
Range: The bit corresponding to the station number turns on.
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
14H (20) 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

15H (21) 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

16H (22) 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

17H (23) 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49

1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS


2 - 10 2.1 Specifications
Setting item Description
Station information Stores the status of the station type, the number of occupied stations, and the extended cyclic settings specified in the
module parameters for slave stations.
Default:
0101H (Ver.1-compatible remote I/O station, one station occupied, and station number 1)

0140H (Ver.1-compatible remote I/O station, one station occupied, and station number 64)
Range: Refer to the following. 2
b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b0
Station type Number of
occupied stations Station No.

1 to 64
(01H to 40H)

1H: Number of occupied stations: 1


2H: Number of occupied stations: 2
3H: Number of occupied stations: 3
4H: Number of occupied stations: 4

0H: Ver.1-compatible remote I/O station


1H: Ver.1-compatible remote device station
2H: Ver.1-compatible intelligent device station
5H: Ver.2-compatible remote device station (single)
6H: Ver.2-compatible intelligent device station (single)
8H: Ver.2-compatible remote device station (double)
9H: Ver.2-compatible intelligent device station (double)
BH: Ver.2-compatible remote device station (quadruple)
CH: Ver.2-compatible intelligent device station (quadruple)
EH: Ver.2-compatible remote device station (octuple)
FH: Ver.2-compatible intelligent device station (octuple)

Automatic update buffer Stores the buffer memory sizes assigned for a local station, intelligent device station, and standby master station during
assignment transient transmission.
Default: 128 words
Range: 0 (word) (not set) or 128 (words) to 4096 (words)
Note that the total size must be within 4096 (words).
■1st station
• 80H (128): Use prohibited
• 81H (129): Use prohibited
• 82H (130): Automatic update buffer size only for intelligent device stations

■26th station
• CBH (203): Use prohibited
• CCH (204): Use prohibited
• CDH (205): Automatic update buffer size only for intelligent device stations
8-point remote I/O station setting Stores the station number of the remote I/O station where 8 points have been set in the remote I/O station points setting.
When "8 Points + 8 Points (Reserved)" has been set, the station number is stored in both 8-point remote I/O station setting
and 16-point remote I/O station setting.
Default: 0 (Not set)
Range: The bit corresponding to the station number turns on.
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
D0H (208) 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

D1H (209) 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

D2H (210) 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

D3H (211) 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49

1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

16-point remote I/O station setting Stores the station number of the remote I/O station where 16 points have been set in the remote I/O station points setting.
When "8 Points + 8 Points (Reserved)" has been set, the station number is stored in both 8-point remote I/O station setting
and 16-point remote I/O station setting.
Default: 0 (Not set)
Range: The bit corresponding to the station number turns on.
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
D4H (212) 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

D5H (213) 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

D6H (214) 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

D7H (215) 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49

1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS


2.1 Specifications 2 - 11
Setting item Description
0-point reserved station Stores the station number of the reserved station where 0 points have been set.
specification Default: 0 (Not set)
Range: The bit corresponding to the station number turns on.
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
D8H (216) 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

D9H (217) 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

DAH (218) 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

DBH (219) 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49

1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

(1) Communications and automatic update buffer assignment


• Add seven words to the size of data to send/receive and specify it as the communication buffer size.
• Assign necessary automatic update buffer size for each intelligent device.
(2) Parameters required for data link
Set parameters required for data link over CC-Link by using either of the following.
• GX Works3 (Refer to Page 2 - 14 Setting network parameters and link refresh parameters and
exercises in Chapter 3 or later.)
• RLPASET instruction (dedicated instruction) (Refer to Page App. - 59 RLPASET (Setting network
parameters).)
For the procedures from parameter settings by using the RLPASET instruction to data link start, refer to
the following.
 MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application)

2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS


2 - 12 2.1 Specifications
2.2 Operation Settings

2.2.1 Required settings


2
This section describes the procedures before operation. The detailed procedures are described in exercises in Chapter 3 or
later, and therefore omitted here.

1. System configuration
Configure the CC-Link system and set parameters required for start-up, the station number for slave stations, and the
transmission speed.
• Wiring
• Parameter settings
• Slave station number and transmission speed settings

2. Operation check using LEDs


Power on the system and check whether the data link is being performed properly.
If the data link is performed properly, the LED on/off status will be as follows.
• L RUN LED: On
• ERR. LED: Off

3. Programming
Create a program. For details, refer to the following.
 MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application)

2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS


2.2 Operation Settings 2 - 13
2.2.2 Setting network parameters and link refresh
parameters
(1) Setting network parameters for the MELSEC iQ-R series
Network parameters for controlling CC-Link are set with GX Works3 and written into parameter areas of the CPU
module.

(2) Areas for storing network parameters


Network parameters written in the CPU module are transferred to the parameter memory of the master station when the
system is powered on or the CPU module is reset.
Data in the parameter memory of the master station is deleted when the system is powered off or when the CPU module
is reset.
(Data is transferred again from the CPU module when the system is powered on or the CPU module is reset.)
CPU module Master station
Parameter area Parameter memory

Power-on
CC-Link system CPU reset CC-Link system
network network
parameter area parameter area

(3) Setting link refresh parameters for the MELSEC iQ-R series
Link refresh parameters for updating devices between the master/local module and the CPU module are set with GX
Works3 and written into parameter areas of the CPU module.
(Link refresh parameters are not transferred to the master station.)
Link refresh parameters cannot be set with a sequence program.
Note) Link refresh parameters are set on the window for network parameters with GX Works3. Link refresh parameters
and network parameters are written to the CPU module at the same time.

(4) Procedures from parameter settings to data link startup


Follow the procedures below.

GX Works3 CPU module RJ61BT11 master station


Create network parameters
and link refresh parameters CC-Link system
with GX Works3 and write parameter area Parameter memory
them to the CPU module. Network Network Network
parameter parameter parameter
Link refresh Link refresh
parameter parameter

GX Works3 CPU module RJ61BT11 master station


Powering on the
programmable controller CC-Link system
system or resetting the parameter area Parameter memory
CPU module transfers the Network Network Network
network parameters in the parameter parameter parameter
CPU module to the master Link refresh Link refresh
station and automatically parameter parameter
starts data link.

2 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATION SETTINGS


2 - 14 2.2 Operation Settings
3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)
This exercise is for the system where only remote I/O modules have been connected in the CC-Link remote net Ver.1 mode.

3.1 System Configuration


The following figure shows the system configuration of the demonstration machine for Exercise 1.

(1) Module configuration


3
Station No.: 0
Master (RJ61BT11)

Demonstration machine

R61P R08 R60 R60


Empty

CPU AD4 DA4

Ethernet cable Terminating Station No.: 1 Station No.: 2


resistor Remote I/O module Remote I/O module
AJ65BTB2-16D AJ65SBTC1-32T
GOT2000

24V power
supply cable

CC-Link dedicated cable


Terminating
resistor

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.1 System Configuration 3-1
(2) I/O assignment

RJ61
BT11
R61P RCPU Empty R60 R60 (32
(Power (CPU AD4 DA4 points)
supply No.1) (16 (16 X30 Y30
module) points) points) to to
X4F Y4F

X100 Y170
to to
X10F Y17F
GOT2000

Initial indication device D0 Initial indication device D1 Initial indication device D10 (32 bits)

Initial input device D20 Initial input device D21 Initial input device D30 (32 bits)

Screen 1 Screen 2

Screen 3 Screen 4

Upper section: The indication device can be changed.


Lower section: Data is displayed.

Upper section: The input device can be changed.


Lower section: The input data can be set and displayed.

• Touching switches the screen.


• The initial value is automatically set to a device number in the upper section (trigger action function).
• Touching the "Initialize Input/Indication Device" button also initializes the device number.

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3-2 3.1 System Configuration
3.2 Setting Modules

3.2.1 Part names of the master/local module


This section describes the part names of the master station RJ61BT11.

3
(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

No. Name Description


(1) RUN LED Indicates the operating status.
On: Normal operation
Off: A hardware error or a watchdog timer error has occurred.
ERR. LED Indicates the error status of the module.
The details of errors can be checked by using the following.
• CC-Link diagnostics ( MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application))
• 'Detailed LED display status' (SW0058) ( MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application))
On: One of the following errors has occurred.
• The error on all the stations was detected.
• Two or more master stations are connected on the same line.
• Settings are incorrect.
• A cable is disconnected or a transmission path is affected by noise.
Flashing: A station with a data link error was detected. Or the station number set for a remote station is already in use.
Off: Normal operation
MST LED Indicates whether the module is operating as a master station.
On: Operating as a master station (during data link control)
Off: Operating as a local station or a standby master station (in standby status)
S MST LED Indicates whether the module is operating as a standby master station.
On: Operating as a standby master station (in standby)
Off: Operating as a master station or a local station
B RATE 156K Indicates the transmission speed that is normally operating.
LED On: Operating at the indicated transmission speed
625K
All off: Transmission speed auto-tracking (When succeeded, the LED of the followed transmission speed turns on.)
2.5M
5M
10M
L RUN LED Indicates the data link status.
On: Data link in progress
Off: Data link not performed
L ERR. LED Indicates the error status of a data link.
On: A data link error has occurred at own station.
Flashing: The communications are unstable due to the following reasons.
• A terminating resistor is not connected.
• The communications are affected by noise.
Off: Normal operation
SD LED Indicates whether the module is sending data.
On: Data being sent
Off: Data not sent
RD LED Indicates whether the module is receiving data.
On: Data being received
Off: Data not received

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.2 Setting Modules 3-3
No. Name Description
(2) Dot matrix LED Displays the station number set in the module.
Indicates the following during the offline or test mode.
Offline: "..."
Line test based on module parameter settings: "L.T."
Hardware test: "H.T."
(3) Terminal block Used to connect Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cables.
For the connection method, refer to Page 3 - 11 Connecting CC-Link dedicated cables.
The SLD and FG terminals are connected inside the module.
Because a two-piece terminal block is used, the module can be replaced without disconnecting the signal line to the terminal
block.
Before installing or removing the terminal block, power off the module.
(4) Production Shows the production information (16 digits) of the module.
information
marking

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3-4 3.2 Setting Modules
3.2.2 Setting parameters of the master/local module
This section describes the parameter settings required for the master/local module.

Setting parameters
The parameter settings of the RJ61BT11 are described on Page 3 - 18 Parameter settings (master station) or later. Thus,
detailed explanations are omitted here.

1. Select program elements (objects) from the "Element Selection" window and arrange them in the "Module Configuration"
window. 3
Double-click [Module Configuration] in the "Navigation" window.

2. The parameters of the master/local module includes the required settings, basic settings, and application settings.
Double-click the master/local module on the Module Configuration window to set parameters.

3. After setting parameters, click the [Apply] button.

4. Write the parameters to the CPU module using the engineering tool.
[Online]  [Write to PLC]

5. The parameters are reflected by resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system.

Required Settings
Set the station type and mode of the master/local module.

: Can be set, : Cannot be set


Item Availability
Master station Master station (duplex Local station/standby master
function) station
Station Type   
Mode   
Station Number   
Transmission Speed   
Parameter Setting Method   

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.2 Setting Modules 3-5
Station Type
Set the station type of the master/local module.
Item Description Setting range*1
Station Set the station type of the master/local module. • Master Station
Type • To use this module as a standby master station, select "Master Station (Duplex Function)" or "Standby Master • Master Station (Duplex
Station". Function)
• When "Master Station (Duplex Function)" is set, the master station returns as a standby master operating • Standby Master Station
station while data link is performed by a standby master station. • Local Station
(Default: Master Station)

*1 When "Setting Method of Basic/Application Settings" in "Parameter Setting Method" is set to "Program", the setting range is fixed to
"Master Station".

Mode
Set the mode of the master/local module.
Item Description Setting range
Master station*1 Master station (duplex Standby master station, local
function) station
Mode Set the mode of the master/ • Remote Net Ver.1 Mode • Remote Net Ver.1 Mode • Remote Net Ver.1 Mode
local module. • Remote Net Ver.2 Mode • Remote Net Ver.2 Mode • Remote Net Ver.2 Mode
• Remote Device Net Ver.1 Mode • Offline • Offline
• Remote Device Net Ver.2 Mode • Line Test • Hardware Test
• Remote I/O Net Mode • Hardware Test (Default: Remote Net Ver.1 Mode)
• Offline (Default: Remote Net Ver.1 Mode)
• Line Test
• Hardware Test
(Default: Remote Net Ver.1 Mode)

*1 When "Setting Method of Basic/Application Settings" in "Parameter Setting Method" is set to "Program", "Remote I/O Net Mode" cannot
be set.

Station Number
Set the station number of the master/local module.
Item Description Setting range
Master station Master station (duplex Standby master station, local
function) station
Station No. Set the station number of the Fixed to 0*1 0 to 64 1 to 64
master/local module. (Default: 0) (Default: Blank) (Default: Blank)

*1 When "Mode" is set to "Line Test", the setting range is 0 to 64.

Transmission Speed
Set the transmission speed of the master/local module.
Item Description Setting range
Master station, master station Standby master station, local station
(duplex function)
Transmissi Set the transmission speed of the master/local • 156kbps • 156kbps
on Speed module. • 625kbps • 625kbps
• 2.5Mbps • 2.5Mbps
• 5Mbps • 5Mbps
• 10Mbps • 10Mbps
(Default: 156kbps) • Auto-tracking
(Default: Auto-tracking)

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3-6 3.2 Setting Modules
(1) Set sequential station numbers.
Station numbers can be set regardless of the connection order of stations. For a module that occupies
two or more stations, set the start station number.
If set station numbers are not sequential, an unoccupied station number will be handled as a "data link
faulty station".
When not setting station numbers sequentially, set unoccupied station numbers as reserved stations.
(Set reserved stations in the CC-Link configuration setting of the module parameters.)
(2) Set station numbers not to overlap each other. 3
Otherwise, an installation error will occur.
(3) Use the same transmission speed for the master station, remote stations, local stations, intelligent device
stations, and the standby master station.
If the setting for even one of the stations is different, data link cannot be performed properly.

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.2 Setting Modules 3-7
3.2.3 Part names and settings of the remote I/O module
This section describes the part names and settings of the AJ65BTB2-16D and AJ65SBTC1-32T.

■AJ65BTB2-16D
(2) Set "0" according
to the master
Set "0".
(1) module setting
(156kbps).
Set "1".
(3) Station No.: 1
(4) Set "0".

No. Name Description


(1) Operation status indicator LED
LED Details
name
PW Turns on when the remote I/O module is powered on.
L RUN Used to check if the remote I/O station communicates with the master station without
errors.
This LED turns on when the remote I/O module receives normal data from the master
station, and turns off for timeout. (This LED turns on when the module receives normal
data.)
SD Turns on when data is sent.
RD Turns on when the module receives data.
L ERR This LED turns on when a transmission error (CRC error) has occurred.
This LED turns off for timeout. (The L RUN LED also turns off.)
This LED turns on when the station number setting or transmission speed setting is
incorrect. (This LED turns off by correcting the setting and powering off and on the
module.)
This LED flashes when the station number setting or transmission speed setting is
changed after start-up. (The L RUN LED remains on. The module keeps operating
with the station number and transmission speed settings at power-on.)
0 to F This LED indicates the on/off state of each input.
This LED turns on when the input is turned on, or turns off when the input is turned off.

(2) Transmission speed setting switch Set the transmission speed setting switch within the range of 0 to 4.

Setting Transmission speed


0 156Kbps
1 625Kbps
2 2.5Mbps
3 5Mbps
4 10Mbps

(3) Station number setting switch Set a station number within the range of 01 to 64.
Set a unique station number.
Use "10" to set the tens place.
Use "1" to set the ones place.
(4) External wiring terminal block Terminal block for power supply, transmission, and input signals

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3-8 3.2 Setting Modules
■AJ65SBTC1-32T
(3) Set only "2" to "ON".
(station No.: 2)
(2) Set all to "OFF" according to
(1) (4)
the master module setting
(156kbps).

(5) (7) (6) (5)

No. Name Description


(1) Operation status indicator LED
LED name Details
PW On: Power supply ON
Off: Power supply OFF
L RUN On: Normal communications
Off: No communications (timeout error)
L ERR On: Communication error
Flashing regularly:
The station number or transmission speed setting switch is changed while power
is on.
Flashing irregularly:
The terminating resistor setting is incorrect.
The module or CC-Link dedicated cable is affected by noise.
Off: Normal communications
Y0 to 1F On: Output ON
Off: Output OFF

(2) Transmission speed setting switch


Setting value Switch status Transmission
4 2 1 speed

0 OFF OFF OFF 156Kbps


1 OFF OFF ON 625Kbps
2 OFF ON OFF 2.5Mbps
3 OFF ON ON 5Mbps
4 ON OFF OFF 10Mbps

Set the transmission speed within the above range.


(3) Station number setting switch Select "10", "20", or "40" of STATION NO. for the tens place.
Select "1", "2", "4", or "8" of STATION NO. for the ones place.
Set a station number within the range of 1 to 64.*1

Station Tens place Ones place


number 40 20 10 8 4 2 1
1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
       
10 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
11 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
       
64 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.2 Setting Modules 3-9
No. Name Description
(4) Indication selector switch*2 When the switch is set to "Y0-YF", LEDs indicate the on/off state of Y0 to YF.
When the switch is set to "Y10-Y1F", LEDs indicate the on/off state of Y10 to Y1F.
(5) Terminal block Terminal block for module power supply, transmission, and output signals
(6) Connector Connector for output signals
(7) DIN rail hook When mounting the module on a DIN rail, push the DIN rail hook on its center line until it clicks.

*1 Set a unique station number.


*2 To operate the indication selector switch, do not use a tool such as a screwdriver.
Doing so may damage the switch.

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3 - 10 3.2 Setting Modules
3.3 Wiring

3.3.1 Connecting CC-Link dedicated cables


This section describes the connection of modules with CC-Link dedicated cables.
When wiring modules, always power off the system.
Master module (RJ61BT11) 3
Terminating
NC resistor
NC
DA
SLD
DB
Remote I/O module (AJ65BTB2-16D) Remote I/O module (AJ65SBTC1-32T)
FG
DG DA DG +24V 24G DA DG +24V 24G

DB SLD FG DB SLD FG
Terminating
resistor

CC-Link dedicated cable CC-Link dedicated cable

• Connect a terminating resistor between the DA and DB terminals.


• Connect the shield cable of a Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cable to the SLD terminal of each
module via the FG terminal. Then ground the cable at both ends with a ground resistance of 100 ohms or
less. The SLD and FG terminals have been connected inside the module.
• For the terminal processing for connecting a Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cable to the terminal
block, do not detangle the DA/DB/DG cable (three wires in one cable) or remove the sheath more than
necessary. (For cables with fillers, cut them using a tool.)

3.3.2 Connecting 24V power supply cables


This section describes the connection of the 24V power supply cables (for internal module, external I/O) for remote I/O
modules. (CC-Link dedicated cables and terminating resistors are omitted in the figure below.)
When wiring modules, always power off the system.
Remote I/O module (AJ65BTB2-16D) Remote I/O module (AJ65SBTC1-32T)

DA DG +24V 24G COMB XE XF COMB DA DG +24V 24G

DB SLD FG XD COMB COMA DB SLD FG

*1 (External I/O)
power supply
24V power supply
connector

*1 The external I/O power supply of the AJ65BTB2-16D has both polarities. (Both the combination of COMA+ and COMB- and the
combination of COMA- and COMB+ are available.)

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.3 Wiring 3 - 11
3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters

3.4.1 Starting GX Works3


Start GX Works3 to set parameters of the master station.

Operating procedure

1. Click [MELSOFT]  [GX Works3]  [GX


Works3] from the Windows Start menu*1.

*1 Select [Start]  [All apps] or [Start] [All Programs].

2. Click on the toolbar or select [Project] 


[New] (Ctrl + N) from the menu.

2. Click!

(To the next page)

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3 - 12 3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters
(From the previous page)

3. Click the list button of "Series".


3. Click!

4. Select "RCPU" from the drop-down menu.

4. Click and select!

5. Click the list button of "Type".


5. Click!

6. Select "R08" from the drop-down menu.

6. Click and select!

7. Click the list button of "Program Language".

8. Select "Ladder" from the drop-down menu.

7. Click!

8. Click and select!

(To the next page)

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters 3 - 13
(From the previous page)

9. Click the [OK] button.

9. Click!

10. Click the [OK] button.

10. Click!

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3 - 14 3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters
3.4.2 Adding master/local module data
Adding a master/local module in the module configuration enables users to set parameters of the master/local module.

Operating procedure
1. Double-click [Module Configuration] in the
"Navigation" window.
When the dialog box about parameter
information appears, click the [OK] button. 3
1. Double-click!

2. The "Module Configuration" window appears.


Select "R35B" from "Main Base" in the
"Element Selection" window, and drag and
drop it to the "Module Configuration" window.

2. Drag and drop!

3. "R35B" is added on the "Module


Configuration" window.

3. Added!

(To the next page)

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters 3 - 15
(From the previous page)

4. Select "R61P" from "Power Supply" in the


"Element Selection" window, and drag and
drop it to the power supply slot of the R35B on
the "Module Configuration" window.
While the power supply module is being
dragged and dropped, the slot where the
power supply module can be arranged is
4. Drag and drop! highlighted.

5. Add the R08CPU that has already been


arranged in the module configuration to the
CPU slot of the R35B.
When the R08CPU has not been arranged in
the module configuration, add the R08CPU
from the "Element Selection" window in the
same way as for the power supply module.

5. Drag and drop!

6. Add the following modules from the "Element


Selection" window.

Slot No.1:
Analog input "R60AD4"

Slot No.2:
6. Added! Analog output "R60DA4"

Slot No.3:
Network module "RJ61BT11"

(To the next page)

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3 - 16 3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters
(From the previous page)

7. Right-click the RJ61BT11, and click


[Parameter]  [Input Detailed Configuration
Information Window] from the menu to display
the "Input the Configuration Detailed
Information" window. Set parameters as
follows. 3
[Parameters to be set]
Start XY: 0030
7. Set! Station Type: Master Station

8. After the settings, right-click the RJ61BT11


and click [Parameter]  [Fix] from the menu to
fix the parameters.
(Click the [No] button on the confirmation
window for adding the module label.)

8. Click!

9. The data of the specified modules are added


to the "Navigation" window.

9. Added!

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters 3 - 17
3.4.3 Parameter settings (master station)
Set parameters of the master station.

Operating procedure
1. Double-click the RJ61BT11 module in the
module configuration.

1. Double-click!

2. The "RJ61BT11 Module Parameter" dialog


box appears. Select "Network Configuration
Settings" of "Basic Settings" in "Setting Item
List" and click the button of "CC-Link
Configuration".

2. Click!

(To the next page)

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3 - 18 3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters
(From the previous page)

3. The "CC-Link Configuration" dialog box


appears. Select "AJ65BTB2-16D" from "Input
Module (Screw/2-piece Terminal Block Type)"
in "Module List" and drag and drop it to the list
of stations or the network map.
3

3. Drag and drop!

4. "AJ65BTB2-16D" is added to the list of


stations.

4. Added!

(To the next page)

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters 3 - 19
(From the previous page)

5. Add "AJ65SBTC1-32T" from "Output Module


(One-touch Connector Type)" in "Module List"
in the same way.

5. Added!

6. After the settings, click "Close with Reflecting


the Setting" in the menu to close the "CC-Link
Configuration" dialog box.

6. Click!

(To the next page)

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3 - 20 3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters
(From the previous page)

7. Select "Link Refresh Settings" and click the


button.

7. Click!

8. Set link devices and ranges as shown on the


left.

8. Set!

9. Click the [Apply] button to close the


"RJ61BT11 Module Parameter" dialog box.

9. Click!

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters 3 - 21
3.4.4 Parameter settings (intelligent function module)
Since no intelligent function module is used in this exercise, disable the refresh settings.

Operating procedure
1. Double-click the R60AD4 module in the
module configuration.

1. Double-click!

2. The "R60AD4 Module Parameter" dialog box


appears. Select "Refresh settings" in "Setting
Item List" and set the refresh settings to
"Disable".

Disable the refresh settings for the R60DA4


module in the same way.
2. Set!

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3 - 22 3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters
3.4.5 Specifying a connection destination
Specify a connection destination to write parameters to the CPU module of the master station.

Operating procedure

1. Select [Online]  [Current Connection


Destination] from the menu of the engineering
tool. 3

1. Click!

2. Click the [CPU Module Direct Coupled Setting]


button on the "Specify Connection Destination
Connection" window.

2. Click! The "CPU Module Direct Coupled Setting"


dialog box appears.

3. Select the connection method, and click the


[Yes] button.

3. Click!

4. Click "No Specification" of "Other Station


Setting".

4. Click!

(To the next page)

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters 3 - 23
(From the previous page)

5. Click the [Connection Test] button.

5. Click!

6. Check that the CPU module is successfully


connected.

7. Click the [OK] button.

7. Click!

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3 - 24 3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters
3.4.6 Writing parameters
Write the set parameters of the master station to the CPU module.
When the CPU module already has written data, select [Online]  [CPU Memory Operation] to initialize the memory before
writing parameters of the master station.

Operating procedure
1. Select [Online]  [Write to PLC] from the
menu of the engineering tool. 3

1. Click!

2. The "Online Data Operation" dialog box


appears. Select the following items.

• System Parameter/CPU Parameter


• Module Parameter

2. Click and select!


3. Click the [Execute] button.

3. Click!

(To the next page)

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters 3 - 25
(From the previous page)

4. The "Write to PLC" dialog box appears.

5. When writing the data is completed, the


message "Completed" is displayed. Click the
[Close] button.

4. Click!

6. After writing parameters, click [Project] 


[Save As] from the menu to save the project.

Save destination: Desired location


File name: EX1
Title: Blank

6. Click!

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3 - 26 3.4 Setting and Writing Parameters
3.5 Module Unit Test (Hardware Test)
Temporarily change the settings of the created project "EX1" to check if each master/local module properly functions alone.
Create the module configuration and configure the link refresh settings in advance. ( Page 3 - 12 Setting and Writing
Parameters)

Procedure
1. Check the following before powering on the module.
• Module mounting status
3
• Input power supply voltage
• The RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module is in the STOP position.

2. Set the following item to "Hardware Test".


[Navigation] window  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  RJ61BT11  [Module Parameter]  [Required Settings]
 [Mode]

3. Write the module parameters to the CPU module.

4. Power off and on the system or reset the CPU module to start the hardware test.

Do not perform a hardware test during connection with another station. Doing so may result in a failure of the
test.

Checking the status and result of hardware test


The test status and result can be checked with the LED display of the module.
Test status LED display
Test in progress The dot matrix LED displays "H.T.".
Normal completion The dot matrix LED displays "OK".
Abnormal end The dot matrix LED displays "ERR".

If the test fails, check if the terminating resistor provided with the master/local module has been connected between the DA
and DB terminals. If the terminating resistor has been connected, the possible cause is a hardware failure. Replace the
master/local module.

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.5 Module Unit Test (Hardware Test) 3 - 27
3.6 Line Test
Check whether Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cables have properly been connected and data link can be performed
with slave stations.
Execute the test from the master station.

Procedure
1. Open the "CC-Link Diagnostics" window.
[Diagnostics]  [CC-Link Diagnostics]

2. Double-click "Operation Test" in "Related Functions".

3. Select "Line Test" under "Test Type".

4. Select the slave station where the line test is performed under "Test Target".
• Select "All stations (Station 1-64)" to perform the test for all stations connected.
• Select "Specified station" to perform the test for the station specified. Specify the start station number when the number of
occupied stations is two or more.

5. Click the [Execute] button to start the line test. After the line test is completed, the result is displayed on the right side in
the window.
• Do not write data to the buffer memory areas (buffer memory address: 5E0H and 608H) during line test.
• Do not perform a line test using a program and other peripherals at the same time. The line test may not be normally
performed.

When performing a line test, do not set the transmission speed of slave stations to auto-tracking. The
transmission speed of slave stations needs to be the same as that of the master station. An error may occur
during the line test for slave stations whose transmission speed is set only to auto-tracking. If the error has
occurred, check the cable connection status and the network line status by following the troubleshooting
procedure.

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3 - 28 3.6 Line Test
3.7 Monitoring/Test of the Remote I/O Station
To check that parameters have been properly set and that data link and device refresh have been performed, monitor and test
I/O signals of the remote I/O station.
Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module to the STOP position.

Operating procedure

1. Select [Online]  [Monitor]  [Device/Buffer 3


Memory Batch Monitor] from the menu of the
engineering tool.

1. Click!

2. The "Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor"


dialog box appears. Enter "X200" in "Device
Name" and press the  key.

2. Enter! 3. Turn on the switch connected to the terminal


block "X1" of the AJ65BTB2-16D.

(To the next page)

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.7 Monitoring/Test of the Remote I/O Station 3 - 29
(From the previous page)

4. Check that X201 turns on in the "Device/Buffer


Memory Batch Monitor" dialog box. This
means that data link and link refresh of the
input (RX) were performed normally.

5. Click! 5. Click the [Stop Monitoring] button.

6. Create a temporal ladder program as shown in


the left figure and write it to the CPU module.
Reset the CPU module with the RUN/STOP/
RESET switch and set the switch to the RUN
position.

7. Select [Online]  [Monitor]  [Monitor Mode]


to switch the mode to the monitor mode. Click
[Debug]  [Modify Value] with "X200" being
selected.

7. Click!
8. Check that turning on or off "X200" turns on or
off Y0 of the AJ65SBTC1-32T. This means
that data link and link refresh of the output
(RY) were performed normally.

Monitoring and test of the remote I/O station


are completed.

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3 - 30 3.7 Monitoring/Test of the Remote I/O Station
3.8 Creating a Sequence Program

Refresh device assignment


The following figure shows the refresh relationship among the CPU module, buffer memory of the master station, and remote
I/O stations.

■Remote input (RX) and remote output (RY)


CPU module Master station Remote I/O station (station No.1) 3
Devices Buffer memory AJ65BTB2-16D
Remote input (RX)
X20F to X200 E0H RX0F to RX00
X21F to X210 E1H
E2H
E3H
E4H

to

15FH

Remote output (RY) Remote I/O station (station No.2)


160H AJ65SBTC1-32T
161H
Y22F to Y220 162H RY0F to RY00
Y23F to Y230 163H RY1F to RY10
164H

to

1DFH

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.8 Creating a Sequence Program 3 - 31
Setting sheet
■Station information setting sheet
Station Station type No. of Reserved/invalid station Intelligent buffer specification (word)
No. occupied specification Send Receive Automatic
stations update
1 Remote I/O station 1 No setting   
2 Remote I/O station 1 No setting   

■Device assignment table


Station Device
No. RX → (X) RY ← (Y) RWw → (D) RWr ← (D)
Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side
1 0000 to 000F 00200 to 0020F
 00210 to 0021F
2 0020 to 002F 00220 to 0022F
0030 to 003F 00230 to 0023F

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3 - 32 3.8 Creating a Sequence Program
Sequence program
Create the following sequence program and write it to the CPU module.
Project name EX1

X30 X3F X31 SW80.0


N0 M800
(0) Module Module Own Data link
MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170
3
2 second Flash this
clock device
when the
own station
data link is
N0 M800 normally
operating.

SM400 SW80.0 Y171

Always On Data link Display a


(8) status of station
other No.1 error.
stations
SW80.0 X201 Y176

Turn on this
(11) Data link device when
status of
other RX1 of the
stations station No.1
is on.
N0
(14) MCR

X30 X3F X31 SW80.1


N1 M801
(15) Module
failure
Module
ready
Own
station
Data link
MC
status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second Flash this


clock device
when the
own station
data link is
normally
N1 M801
operating.

SM400 SW80.1 Y172

Always On Data link Display a


(23) status of station
other No.2 error.
stations
SW80.1 X102 Y222

(26) Data link RY2 of the


status of station
other No.2 is on.
stations

N1
(29) MCR

END

(30)

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.8 Creating a Sequence Program 3 - 33
<Reference> Operation check with the LED display
The following describes the LED display status of the master station, remote I/O station, remote device station, and local
station when the data link is performed properly.

(1) LED display of the master station


Check that the LED display is as follows.

This module is normal.


Data link is normally performed.

This module is the master station.

This module is sending data.


Set transmission speed
This module is receiving data.

(2) LED display of the remote I/O station


Check that the LED display is as follows.

Power (24VDC) has been


supplied. Data link is normally performed. This module is sending data. This module is receiving data.

(3) LED display of the remote device station


Check that the LED display is as follows.

Power (24VDC) has been supplied.

This module is normal.

Data link is normally performed.

This module is sending data.

This module is receiving data.

(4) LED display of a local station


Check that the LED display is as follows.

This module is normal.


Data link is normally performed.

This module is not the master station.

This module is sending data.


Set transmission speed
This module is receiving data.

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3 - 34 3.8 Creating a Sequence Program
3.9 Communications with the Remote I/O Station
With the GOT, monitor that an input signal (RX) from the remote I/O station triggers turning on of Y170 in a sequence
program.
Turning on X102 on the GOT turns on an output signal (RY) in the remote I/O station.

Switch operation of the demonstration machine


 Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module to the RESET position (for approximately one second) to reset the
3
CPU module.
 Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module to the RUN position.
Y170 flashes depending on the own station data link status (Data link normal).
 Turn on the switch of the terminal block of the AJ65BTB2-16D. (RX1 turns on.)
Y176 turns on.
 Turn on X102.
The LED "Y2" of the AJ65SBTC1-32T turns on.

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3.9 Communications with the Remote I/O Station 3 - 35
MEMO

3 EXERCISE 1 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 1)


3 - 36 3.9 Communications with the Remote I/O Station
4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)
This exercise is for the system where remote I/O modules and remote device modules (A/D, D/A) are connected in the CC-
Link remote net Ver.1 mode.

4.1 System Configuration


The following figure shows the system configuration of the demonstration machine for Exercise 2.

Station No.: 0
Master (RJ61BT11)
4
Demonstration machine
Empty

R61P R08 R60 R60


CPU AD4 DA4

Ethernet cable Terminating Station No.: 1 Station No.: 2


resistor Remote I/O module Remote I/O module
AJ65BTB2-16D AJ65SBTC1-32T
GOT2000

24V power
supply cable

CC-Link dedicated cable


Station No.: 5 Station No.: 3
Remote device module Remote device module
AJ65BT-64DAV AJ65BT-64AD

Terminating
resistor

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4.1 System Configuration 4-1
4.2 Setting and Connecting Remote Device Stations
This section describes the settings and connections of remote device stations (AJ65BT-64AD analog-digital converter module
and AJ65BT-64DAV digital-analog converter module).

4.2.1 Setting modules


This section describes the settings of the AJ65BT-64AD and the AJ65BT-64DAV.
For details on the functions and specifications of the modules, refer to the Digital-Analog Converter Module type AJ65BT-
64DAV/DAI User's Manual and AJ65BT-64AD Analog-Digital Converter Module User's Manual.

(1) Settings of the AJ65BT-64AD (2 stations occupied)


Set "0" according to the master Set "0".
module setting (156kbps).

Set "3".

Set "•" (other than 1 to 4).

(2) Settings of the AJ65BT-64DAV (2 stations occupied)


Set "0" according to the master Set "0".
module setting (156kbps).

Set "5".

Set "•" (other than 1 to 4).

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4-2 4.2 Setting and Connecting Remote Device Stations
4.2.2 Connecting modules
The following figure shows the connections of CC-Link dedicated cables and terminating resistors in Exercise 2.
Before connecting CC-Link dedicated cables or 24V power supply cables, always shut off the power supply.

(1) Connecting CC-Link dedicated cables


Master module (RJ61BT11)
Terminating
NC resistor
NC
DA
SLD
DB
FG
Remote I/O module (AJ65BTB2-16D) Remote I/O module (AJ65SBTC1-32T)
4
DG DA DG +24V 24G DA DG +24V 24G

DB SLD FG DB SLD FG

CC-Link dedicated cable CC-Link dedicated cable

Remote device module (AJ65BT-64DAV) Remote device module (AJ65BT-64AD)

DA DG +24V 24G DA DG +24V 24G

DB SLD FG DB SLD FG
Terminating
resistor

CC-Link dedicated cable CC-Link dedicated cable

After connecting CC-Link dedicated cables and 24V power supply cables, check if the connection status is normal
through a line test. ( Page 3 - 28 Writing parameters)

(2) Connecting 24V power supply cables


Connect 24V power supply cables in the same way as that of remote I/O stations. ( Page 3 - 11 Connecting 24V
power supply cables)

(3) Connections to analog inputs


Connect cables from the demonstration machine to analog inputs of the AJ65BT-64AD.
To analog input (V+)

DA DG +24V 24G CH1 COM


V+
Remote device module
(AJ65BT-64AD)
DB SLD FG SLD

To analog input (SLD)

To analog input (COM)

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4.2 Setting and Connecting Remote Device Stations 4-3
4.3 Parameter Settings
Set parameters of the master station and initial settings of the remote device stations.
After setting, write the parameters to the CPU module.
For how to write parameters, refer to Page 3 - 25 Writing parameters.

4.3.1 Parameter settings (master station)


Set parameters of the master station.
For how to set parameters, refer to Page 3 - 18 Parameter settings (master station).

Operating procedure
1. In the "CC-Link Configuration" dialog box, drag
and drop the following modules from "Module
List" to the list of stations or the network map.

Analog Input Module (Voltage/Current Input):


AJ65BT-64AD

Analog Output Module (Voltage Output):


1. Set! AJ65BT-64DAV

2. Set the link refresh parameters as shown on


the left.

2. Set!

(To the next page)

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4-4 4.3 Parameter Settings
(From the previous page)

3. Click the [Apply] button to close the


"RJ61BT11 Module Parameter" dialog box.

4
3. Click!

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4.3 Parameter Settings 4-5
4.3.2 Initial procedure registration of the remote device
stations
The AJ65BT-64AD and AJ65BT-64DAV require initial settings.
(For details, refer to the Digital-Analog Converter Module type AJ65BT-64DAV/DAI User's Manual and AJ65BT-64AD Analog-
Digital Converter Module User's Manual.)
For the MELSEC iQ-R series master station, the initial settings of the remote device stations can be performed automatically
and the sequence program can be simplified by registering procedures to network parameters.

The following describes the initial procedure registration by using initial settings as an example.

Operating procedure

1. Double-click the RJ61BT11 module in the


module configuration.

1. Double-click!

2. The "RJ61BT11 Module Parameter" dialog


box appears. Select "Initial Settings" of "Basic
Settings" in "Setting Item List" and click the
button of "Remote Device Station Initial
Settings".

2. Click!

(To the next page)

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4-6 4.3 Parameter Settings
(From the previous page)

3. The "Remote Device Initial Setting Target


Station No. Setting" dialog box appears.
Enter "3" in "Target Station No.".

4. The reference button appears at the right edge


4. Click! of "Registered Procedure Information" field for
the registered target station number. Click this
3. Enter!
button. 4

5. The "Remote Device Initial Setting Procedure


Registration" dialog box appears.

6. Set the following values in the top row as


follows.
• Execution Condition: RX, 18, ON
• Details of Execution: RY, 0, ON
6. Set! (With the above setting, turning on RX18 turns
on RY0.)

7. Set "Operational Condition" of the second row


to "Same as Prev. Set".
(When "Same as Prev. Set" is set, the same
condition as the above row is set to the second
row.)

7. Set!

(To the next page)

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4.3 Parameter Settings 4-7
(From the previous page)

8. Repeat step 6 to step 7 to set as shown on the


left.

The following shows execution details of each


device.
RY0: ON ••• The offset/gain value is the
factory default value.
RWw0: 257 (101H) ••• CH1 is Average
processing (time average).
RWw1: 500 ••• Average time (ms)
RWw6: 1 ••• A/D conversion of CH1 is
enabled.

9. Click the [OK] button in the "Remote Device


Initial Setting Procedure Registration" dialog
box.

9. Click!

10. Enter "5" in "Target Station No." of the second


row.

11. The reference button appears at the right edge


of "Registered Procedure Information" field for
the registered target station number. Click this
11. Click! button.

10. Enter!

(To the next page)

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4-8 4.3 Parameter Settings
(From the previous page)

12. Set devices as shown on the left.

The following shows execution details of each


device.
RY4: ON ••• The offset/gain value is the
factory default value.
RWw4: 14 (000EH) ••• CH1 Analog output is
enabled.
4

13. Click the [OK] button in the "Remote Device


Initial Setting Procedure Registration" dialog
box.

13. Click!

14. Click the [OK] button in the "Remote Device


Initial Setting Target Station No. Setting" dialog
box.

14. Click!

The remote device station initial setting is completed.


After completion of the initial setting, click the [Apply] button in the "Module Parameter" dialog box and write the settings to the
CPU module.

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4.3 Parameter Settings 4-9
When performing the initial settings with sequence programs
To perform the initial settings in Page 4 - 6 Initial procedure registration of the remote device stations with sequence
programs, use the following sequence programs.
(The following sequence programs are not used in this exercise because the initial settings are performed with the parameter
settings.)

■Initial settings for station No.3 (AJ65BT-64AD)


X258
(0) SET Y240 Offset/gain value
(RX18) (RY0) (factory default value)

MOVP H101 D1008 CH1 Averaging processing


(RWw0) (Time average)

MOVP K500 D1009 Averaging processing


(RWw1) time: 500ms

MOVP H1 D1014 CH1 A/D conversion


(RWw6) enable

TO H0A H1E8 D1108 K7 Write to the master


(RWr0) module.

SET Y258
(RY18)

SET Y259
(RY19) Initial data processing
X258
(18) RST Y258
(RX18) (RY18)
X259
(20) RST Y259
(RX19) (RY19)

(22) END

■Initial settings for station No.5 (AJ65BT-64DAV)


X298
(0) SET Y284 Offset/gain value
(RX18) (RY4) (factory default value)

MOVP H0E D1020 CH1 Analog output


(RWw4) enabled

TO H0A H1F4 D1020 K1 Write to the master


(RWw4) module.

SET Y298
(RY18)

SET Y299
(RY19) Initial data processing
X298
(12) RST Y298
(RX18) (RY18)
X299
(14) RST Y299
(RX19) (RY19)

(16) END

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4 - 10 4.3 Parameter Settings
4.4 Monitoring and Test of the Remote Device Station
In the communications with the remote device station, monitoring and test are performed by GX Works3.
For monitoring and device test, refer to the operation described in Page 3 - 29 Monitoring/Test of the Remote I/O Station.

Operating procedure

1. Enter "D1108" in "Device Name" and press the


 key on the "Device/Buffer Memory
Batch Monitor" dialog box.

1. Enter! 4

2. Check that a digital output value is stored in


D1108.

(To the next page)

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4.4 Monitoring and Test of the Remote Device Station 4 - 11
(From the previous page)

3. Check the device "D1016" and double-click


the "Current Value" row.

3. Double-click!

4. The dialog box shown on the left appears.


Click the [Yes] button.

4. Click!

5. A watch window appears.


Set "1000" in "Current Value".

5. Set!

(To the next page)

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4 - 12 4.4 Monitoring and Test of the Remote Device Station
(From the previous page)

6. The value "1000" is stored in CH1 Digital value


setting area of the AJ65BT-64DAV, and the
output voltmeter (D/A OUTPUT) on the screen
4 indicates approximately 2.5V.

Monitoring and test of the remote device


station are completed.

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4.4 Monitoring and Test of the Remote Device Station 4 - 13
4.5 Creating a Sequence Program

Refresh device assignment


The following figure shows the refresh relationship among the CPU module, buffer memory of the master station, and remote
device stations.
The refresh relationship among the CPU module, buffer memory of the master station, and remote I/O stations is the same as
that of Exercise 1.
For details on each remote device station, refer to the Digital-Analog Converter Module type AJ65BT-64DAV/DAI User's
Manual and AJ65BT-64AD Analog-Digital Converter Module User's Manual.

■Remote input (RX) and remote output (RY)


Remote device station (station No.3)
CPU module Master station AJ65BT-64AD
Devices Buffer memory
Remote input (RX)
E0H
to
E3H Remote input (RX)
X24F to X240 E4H RX0F to RX00
X25F to X250 E5H RX1F to RX10
E6H
E7H
X28F to X280 E8H
X29F to X290 E9H Remote output (RY)
EAH RY0F to RY00
EBH RY1F to RY10
ECH
to
15FH

Remote output (RY) Remote device station (station No.5)


160H AJ65BT-64DAV
to
163H
Y24F to Y240 164H Remote input (RX)
Y25F to Y250 165H RX0F to RX00
166H RX1F to RX10
167H
Y28F to Y280 168H
Y29F to Y290 169H
16AH Remote output (RY)
16BH RY0F to RY00
16CH RY1F to RY10

to
1DFH

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4 - 14 4.5 Creating a Sequence Program
■Remote register (RWw, RWr)
Remote device station (station No.3)
CPU module Master station AJ65BT-64AD
Devices Buffer memory
Remote register (RWw)

Remote register (RWw)


D1008 1E8H Averaging process setting Averaging process setting
CH1 Time Average/Count
D1009 1E9H Average CH1 Time Average/Count Average
CH2 Time Average/Count
D1010 1EAH Average CH2 Time Average/Count Average
CH3 Time Average/Count
D1011 1EBH Average CH3 Time Average/Count Average
CH4 Time Average/Count
D1012 1ECH Average CH4 Time Average/Count Average

D1013 1EDH Data format Data format


D1014 1EEH A/D conversion enable/disable
setting
A/D conversion enable/disable
setting
(Not used)
4
D1015 1EFH
D1016 1F0H CH1 Digital value
D1017 1F1H CH2 Digital value
D1018 1F2H CH3 Digital value Remote register (RWr)
D1019 1F3H CH4 Digital value CH1 Digital output value
D/A conversion enable/disable
D1020 1F4H setting CH2 Digital output value
D1021 1F5H CH3 Digital output value
D1022 1F6H CH4 Digital output value
D1023 1F7H Error code
1F8H (Not used)
(Not used)
to
(Not used)
2DFH

Remote device station (station No.5)


Remote register (RWr) AJ65BT-64DAV
2E0H
to
2E7H Remote register (RWw)
D1108 2E8H CH1 Digital output value CH1 Digital value
D1109 2E9H CH2 Digital output value CH2 Digital value
D1110 2EAH CH3 Digital output value CH3 Digital value
D1111 2EBH CH4 Digital output value CH4 Digital value
D/A conversion enable/disable
D1112 2ECH Error code setting
D1113 2EDH (Not used)
D1114 2EEH (Not used)
D1115 2EFH (Not used)
D1116 2F0H CH1 Setting value check code

D1117 2F1H CH2 Setting value check code

D1118 2F2H CH3 Setting value check code Remote register (RWr)
D1119 2F3H CH4 Setting value check code CH1 Setting value check code

D1120 2F4H Error code CH2 Setting value check code

D1121 2F5H CH3 Setting value check code

D1122 2F6H CH4 Setting value check code

D1123 2F7H Error code


2F8H (Not used)
(Not used)
to
(Not used)
3DFH

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4.5 Creating a Sequence Program 4 - 15
Setting sheet
■Station information setting sheet
Station Station type No. of Reserved/invalid station Intelligent buffer specification (word)
No. occupied specification Send Receive Automatic
stations update
1 Remote I/O station 1 No setting   
2 Remote I/O station 1 No setting   
3 Remote device station 2 No setting   
4
5 Remote device station 2 No setting   
6

■Device assignment table


Station Device
No. RX → (X) RY ← (Y) RWw → (D) RWr ← (D)
Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side
1 0000 to 000F 00200 to 0020F
 00210 to 0021F
2 0020 to 002F 00220 to 0022F
0030 to 003F 00230 to 0023F
3 0040 to 004F 00240 to 0024F 0040 to 004F 00240 to 0024F 0008 to 000B 1008 to 1011 0008 to 000B 1108 to 1111
0050 to 005F 00250 to 0025F 0050 to 005F 00250 to 0025F
4  00260 to 0026F  00260 to 0026F 000C to 000F 1012 to 1015 000C to 000F 1112 to 1115
 00270 to 0027F  00270 to 0027F
5 0080 to 008F 00280 to 0028F 0080 to 008F 00280 to 0028F 0010 to 0013 1016 to 1019 0010 to 0013 1116 to 1119
0090 to 009F 00290 to 0029F 0090 to 009F 00290 to 0029F
6 002A0 to 002A0 to 0014 to 0017 1020 to 1023 0014 to 0017 1120 to 1123
002AF 002AF
002B0 to 002B0 to
002BF 002BF

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4 - 16 4.5 Creating a Sequence Program
Sequence program
Create the following sequence program and write it to the CPU module.
The areas surrounded by broken lines indicate changes from the sequence program of Exercise 1.

Project name EX2

X30 X3F X31 SW80.0


N0 M800
(0) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

4
2 second Flash this
clock device
when the
own station
data link is
N0 M800 normally
operating.

*Data link status


SM400 SW80.0 Y171

(8) Always On Data link Display a


status of station
other No.1 error.
stations
SW80.0 X201 Y176

(12) Data link Turn on


status of this device
other when RX1
stations of the station
No.1 is on.
N0
(15) MCR

X30 X3F X31 SW80.1


N1 M801
(16) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second Flash this


clock device
when the
own station
data link is
N1 M801 normally
operating.

*Data link status


SM400 SW80.1 Y172

(24) Always On Data link Display a


status of station
other No.2 error.
stations
SW80.1 X102 Y222

(28) Data link RY2 of the


status of station
other No.2 is on.
stations

N1
(31) MCR

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4.5 Creating a Sequence Program 4 - 17
X30 X3F X31 SW80.2
N2 M802
(32) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second Flash this


clock device
when the
own station
data link is
N2 M802 normally
operating.

*Data link status


SM400 SW80.2 Y173

(40) Always On Data link Display a


status of station
other No.3 error.
stations
*Execution of the station No.3 program
SW80.2
P3
Processing
(44) Data link CALL of station
status of No.3
other
stations

N2
(49) MCR

X30 X3F X31 SW80.4


N4 M804
(50) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second Flash this


clock device
when the
own station
data link is
N4 M804 normally
operating.

*Data link status


SM400 SW80.4 Y174

(58) Always On Data link Display a


status of station
other No.5 error.
stations
*Execution of the station No.5 program
SW80.4
P5
Processing
(62) Data link CALL of station
status of
other No.5
stations

N4
(67) MCR

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4 - 18 4.5 Creating a Sequence Program
(68) FEND

*Station No.3 AJ65BT-64AD communication program


P3 X258
SB0D
Processing (70) Initial Initial
SET procedure
of station processing
No.3 request registration
flag instruction

X298

Initial
processing
request
flag
SB5F
SB0D
4
Initial
(75) Initial RST procedure
procedure registration
execution instruction
completed flag
X25B X29B

Remote Remote
ready ready

X25B X240
D1108 D10
CH1
(80) Remote CH1 A/D MOV Digital
ready conversion output
completed value
flag
X25A Y25A

(84) Error flag Error reset

(86) RET

*Station No.5 AJ65BT-64DAV communication program


P5 X298
SB0D
Initial
Processing (87) Initial SET procedure
of station processing registration
No.5 request instruction
flag
X258

Initial
processing
request
flag
SB5F
SB0D
Initial
(92) Initial RST procedure
procedure registration
execution instruction
completed flag
X25B X29B

Remote Remote
ready ready

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4.5 Creating a Sequence Program 4 - 19
X29B X104
D20 D1016
CH1
(97) Remote MOVP Digital
ready value
setting area

K4000 D20 K4000 D1016


CH1
< MOV Digital
value
setting area

D1016 D0
CH1
MOV Digital
value
setting area

X105 X29B Y280

(112) Remote CH1


ready Analog
output
enable
X29A Y29A

(115) Error flag Error reset

(117) RET

END

(118)

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4 - 20 4.5 Creating a Sequence Program
4.6 Communications with the Remote Device Station
The communications with the remote device station are performed using the sequence program written to the CPU module.

Switch operation of the demonstration machine


 Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module to the RESET position (for approximately one second) to reset the
CPU module.

 Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module to the RUN position.
Y170 flashes depending on the own station data link status (Data link normal).

 The initial indication device (D10) displays a digital output value.


Turn the volume for input of the demonstration machine.
4
The digital output value changes in response to changes of the input voltmeter (A/D INPUT).

 Set "2000" to the initial input device (D20) as an example and turn on X104.
The initial indication device (D0) displays "2000".

 Turn on X105 for DA output.


The output voltmeter (D/A OUTPUT) on the screen 4 indicates approximately 5V.

 Change the setting of the initial input device D20 (range: 0 to 4000) in the same way, and turn on X104 again (on  off 
on) for DA output.

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4.6 Communications with the Remote Device Station 4 - 21
MEMO

4 EXERCISE 2 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 2)


4 - 22 4.6 Communications with the Remote Device Station
5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)
This exercise is for when a CC-Link local station is added to the system for Exercise 2.

5.1 System Configuration


The following figure shows the system configuration of the demonstration machine for Exercise 3.

Station No.: 0
Master (RJ61BT11)

Demonstration machine

R61P R08 R60 R60 5


Empty

CPU AD4 DA4

Ethernet cable Terminating Station No.: 1 Station No.: 2


resistor Remote I/O module Remote I/O module
AJ65BTB2-16D AJ65SBTC1-32T
GOT2000

24V power
supply cable

CC-Link dedicated cable

Station No.: 5 Station No.: 3


Remote device module Remote device module
AJ65BT-64DAV AJ65BT-64AD

Station No.: 7
Local (RJ61BT11)

Demonstration machine

R61P R08 R60 R60


Empty

CPU AD4 DA4

Ethernet cable
Terminating
resistor

GOT2000

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5.1 System Configuration 5-1
5.2 Connecting Modules
The following figure shows the connections of CC-Link dedicated cables and terminating resistors in Exercise 3.
For the connection method of 24V power supply cables, refer to Exercise 2.
Before connecting CC-Link dedicated cables, always shut off the power supply.
Master module (RJ61BT11)
Terminating
NC resistor
NC
DA
SLD
DB Remote I/O module (AJ65BTB2-16D) Remote I/O module (AJ65SBTC1-32T)
FG
DG DA DG +24V 24G DA DG +24V 24G

DB SLD FG DB SLD FG

CC-Link dedicated cable CC-Link dedicated cable

Remote device module (AJ65BT-64DAV) Remote device module (AJ65BT-64AD)

DA DG +24V 24G DA DG +24V 24G

DB SLD FG DB SLD FG

CC-Link dedicated cable CC-Link dedicated cable


Terminating
NC resistor
NC
DA
SLD
DB
FG
DG

Local module (RJ61BT11)

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5-2 5.2 Connecting Modules
5.3 Parameter Settings
Set parameters of the master station and local station.
After setting, write the parameters to the CPU module.
For how to write parameters, refer to Page 3 - 25 Writing parameters.

5.3.1 Parameter settings (master station)


Set parameters of the master station.
For how to set parameters, refer to Page 3 - 18 Parameter settings (master station).
(The initial settings are the same as those of Exercise 2.)

Operating procedure
1. In the "CC-Link Configuration" dialog box, 5
select "RJ61BT11" from "Master/Local
Module" in "Module List" and drag and drop it
to the list of stations or the network map.

1. Set!

2. Set the link refresh parameters as shown on


the left.

2. Set!

(To the next page)

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5.3 Parameter Settings 5-3
(From the previous page)

3. Click the [Apply] button to close the


"RJ61BT11 Module Parameter" dialog box.

4. After setting parameters, save the project with


the file name "EX3-M".

3. Click!

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5-4 5.3 Parameter Settings
5.3.2 Parameter settings (local station)
In a project different from the one in which parameters of the master station have been set, add a local module in the module
configuration and set parameters of the local station.
For how to create a module configuration, refer to Page 3 - 15 Adding master/local module data.

Operating procedure
1. Create a new project and add modules by
following the procedure described in Page 3 -
15 Adding master/local module data. After
configuring the following settings, fix
parameters.
(Click the [No] button on the confirmation
window for adding the module label.)
5
[Parameters to be set]
RJ61BT11
Start XY: 0030
Station Type: Local Station

1. Added!

2. Double-click the RJ61BT11 on the "Module


Configuration" window to open the "RJ61BT11
Module Parameter" dialog box. Set "7" for
"Station No.".

2. Set!

(To the next page)

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5.3 Parameter Settings 5-5
(From the previous page)

3. Set the link refresh parameters as shown on


the left.

3. Set!

4. Click the [Apply] button to close the


"RJ61BT11 Module Parameter" dialog box.

5. After setting parameters, save the project with


the file name "EX3-L".

4. Click!

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5-6 5.3 Parameter Settings
5.4 Creating a Sequence Program

Refresh device assignment


The following figure shows the refresh relationship among device areas of the CPU modules, buffer memory of the master
station, and buffer memory of the local station.
The refresh relationship among the CPU modules, buffer memory of the master station, and remote I/O stations are the same
as that of Exercise 2.
Note that RX and RY are placed diagonally between the master station and the local station.

■Remote input (RX) and remote output (RY)


(Master) Local station (Local)
CPU module Master station (station No.7: 1 station occupied) CPU module

Devices Buffer memory Buffer memory Devices


E0H 160H Y20F to Y200 5
to to to

EBH 16BH Y2BF to Y2B0


X2CF to X2C0 ECH RX RY 16CH Y2CF to Y2C0
X2DF to X2D0 EDH RX RY 16DH Y2DF to Y2D0
EEH 16EH
to to
15FH 1DFH
160H E0H X20F to X200
to to to

16BH EBH X2BF to X2B0


Y2CF to Y2C0 16CH RY RX ECH X2CF to X2C0
Y2DF to Y2D0 16DH RY RX EDH X2DF to X2D0
16EH EEH
to to
1DFH 15FH

••• The last two bits cannot be used for communications between the master station and a local station.

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5.4 Creating a Sequence Program 5-7
■Remote register (RWw, RWr)
Local station
CPU module Master station (station No.7: 1 station occupied) CPU module
Devices Buffer memory Buffer memory Devices
Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWr)
1E0H Area for 2E0H D1000
Area for sending receiving data
to data to station from the master to to
1F7H No.1 to No.6 station 2F7H D1023
D1024 1F8H Area for sending Area for 2F8H D1024
data to the local receiving data
to to station (station from the master to to
D1027 1FBH No.7) station 2FBH D1027
1FCH 2FCH
to to
2DFH 3DFH

Remote register (RWr) Remote register (RWw)


2E0H Area for 1E0H D1100
Area for receiving
receiving data
to data from station
from station No.1 to to
2F7H No.1 to No.6 1F7H
to No.6 D1123
D1124 2F8H Area for receiving Area for sending 1F8H D1124
data from the data to own
to to local station station (station to to
D1127 2FBH (station No.7) No.7) 1FBH D1127
2FCH 1FCH
to to
3DFH 2DFH

Between the master station and the local station, each data is stored diagonally.
The following table shows the flow of data between the master station and the local station (station No.7: 1 station occupied).
Master station Flow of data Local station (Station No.7)
Device Buffer memory address Device Buffer memory address
RX ECH to EDH  RY 16CH to 16DH
RY 16CH to 16DH  RX ECH to EDH
RWw 1F8H to 1FBH  RWr 2F8H to 2FBH
RWr 2F8H to 2FBH  RWw 1F8H to 1FBH

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5-8 5.4 Creating a Sequence Program
Setting sheet
■Station information setting sheet
Station Station type No. of Reserved/invalid station Intelligent buffer specification (word)
No. occupied specification Send Receive Automatic
stations update
1 Remote I/O station 1 No setting   
2 Remote I/O station 1 No setting   
3 Remote device station 2 No setting   
4
5 Remote device station 2 No setting   
6
7 Local station 1 No setting   

■Device assignment table


Station Device 5
No. RX → (X) RY ← (Y) RWw → (D) RWr ← (D)
Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side
1 0000 to 000F 00200 to 0020F
 00210 to 0021F
2 0020 to 002F 00220 to 0022F
0030 to 003F 00230 to 0023F
3 0040 to 004F 00240 to 0024F 0040 to 004F 00240 to 0024F 0008 to 000B 1008 to 1011 0008 to 000B 1108 to 1111
0050 to 005F 00250 to 0025F 0050 to 005F 00250 to 0025F
4  00260 to 0026F  00260 to 0026F 000C to 000F 1012 to 1015 000C to 000F 1112 to 1115
 00270 to 0027F  00270 to 0027F
5 0080 to 008F 00280 to 0028F 0080 to 008F 00280 to 0028F 0010 to 0013 1016 to 1019 0010 to 0013 1116 to 1119
0090 to 009F 00290 to 0029F 0090 to 009F 00290 to 0029F
6 002A0 to 002A0 to 0014 to 0017 1020 to 1023 0014 to 0017 1120 to 1123
002AF 002AF
002B0 to 002B0 to
002BF 002BF
7 00C0 to 00CF 002C0 to 00C0 to 00CF 002C0 to 0018 to 001B 1024 to 1027 0018 to 001B 1124 to 1127
002CF 002CF
00D0 to 00DF 002D0 to 00D0 to 00DF 002D0 to
002DF 002DF

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5.4 Creating a Sequence Program 5-9
5.4.1 Master station side sequence program
Create the following sequence program and write it to the CPU module of the master station.
The areas surrounded by broken lines indicate changes from the sequence program of Exercise 2.

Project name EX3-M

X30 X3F X31 SW80.0


N0 M800
(0) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second Flash this


clock device
when the
own station
data link is
N0 M800 normally
operating.

*Data link status


SM400 SW80.0 Y171

(8) Always On Data link Display a


status of station
other No.1 error.
stations
SW80.0 X201 Y176

Turn on
(12) Data link this device
status of when RX1
other of the station
stations No.1 is on.

N0
(15) MCR

X30 X3F X31 SW80.1


N1 M801
(16) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second Flash this


clock device
when the
own station
data link is
N1 M801 normally
operating.

*Data link status


SM400 SW80.1 Y172

Always On Data link


(24) status of Display a
other station
stations No.2 error.

SW80.1 X102 Y222

(28) Data link


RY2 of the
status of
station
other
No.2 is on.
stations

N1
(31) MCR

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5 - 10 5.4 Creating a Sequence Program
X30 X3F X31 SW80.2
N2 M802
(32) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second Flash this


clock device
when the
own station
data link is
N2 M802 normally
operating.

*Data link status


SM400 SW80.2 Y173

(40) Always On Data link Display a


status of station
other No.3 error.
stations
*Execution of the station No.3 program
SW80.2 5
P3
Processing
(44) Data link CALL of station
status of No.3
other
stations

N2
(49) MCR

X30 X3F X31 SW80.4


N4 M804
(50) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second Flash this


clock device
when the
own station
data link is
N4 M804 normally
operating.

*Data link status


SM400 SW80.4 Y174

(58) Always On Data link Display a


status of station
other No.5 error.
stations
*Execution of the station No.5 program
SW80.4
P5
Processing
(62) Data link CALL of station
status of
other No.5
stations

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5.4 Creating a Sequence Program 5 - 11
N4
(67) MCR

X30 X3F X31 SW80.6


N6 M806
(68) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second Flash this


clock device
when the
own station
data link is
N6 M806 normally
operating.

*Data link status


SM400 SW80.6 Y175

(76) Always On Data link Display a


status of station
other No.7 error.
stations
*Execution of the station No.7 program
SW80.6
P7
Data link Processing
(80) CALL of station
status of
other No.7
stations

N6
(85) MCR

(86) FEND

*Station No.3 AJ65BT-64AD communication program


P3 X258
SB0D
Initial
Processing (88) Initial SET procedure
of station processing registration
No.3 request instruction
flag
X298

Initial
processing
request
flag
SB5F
SB0D
Initial Initial
(93) procedure RST procedure
execution registration
completed instruction
flag
X25B X29B

Remote Remote
ready ready

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5 - 12 5.4 Creating a Sequence Program
X25B X240
D1108 D10
(98) Remote CH1 A/D CH1 Digital
MOV
ready conversion output value
completed
flag
X25A Y25A

(102) Error flag Error reset

(104) RET

*Station No.5 AJ65BT-64DAV communication program


P5 X298
SB0D
Processing Initial Initial
of station (105) processing SET procedure
No.5 request registration
flag instruction

X258
5
Initial
processing
request
flag
SB5F
SB0D
Initial Initial
(110) procedure RST procedure
execution registration
completed instruction
flag
X25B X29B

Remote Remote
ready ready

X29B X104
D20 D1016
CH1
(115) Remote MOVP Digital
ready value
setting area

K4000 D20 K4000 D1016


CH1
< MOV Digital
value
setting area

D1016 D0
CH1
MOV Digital
value
setting area

X105 X29B Y280

Remote CH1
(130) ready Analog
output
enable
X29A Y29A

(133) Error flag Error reset

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5.4 Creating a Sequence Program 5 - 13
(135) RET

*Program for communications with the station No.7 (local station)


P7 X2C2 Y177

Processing Turn on
of station (136) this device
No.7 when X2
of the local
station is on.
SM400
D1124 D1
Data
(140) Always On MOV received
from local
stations

X106
D21 D1024
(143) MOV Data sent
to local
stations

(146) RET

END

(147)

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5 - 14 5.4 Creating a Sequence Program
5.4.2 Local station side sequence program
Create the following sequence program and write it to the CPU module of the local station.

Project name EX3-L

X30 X3F X31 SW80.0


N0 M800
(0) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second
clock

N0 M800

5
*Data link status
SM400 SW80.0 Y171

(8) Always On Data link Display a


status of station
other No.1 error.
stations

N0
(12) MCR

X30 X3F X31 SW80.1


N1 M801
(13) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second
clock

N1 M801

*Data link status


SM400 SW80.1 Y172

(21) Always On Data link


Display a
status of
station
other
No.2 error.
stations

N1
(25) MCR

X30 X3F X31 SW80.2


N2 M802
(26) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second
clock

N2 M802

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5.4 Creating a Sequence Program 5 - 15
*Data link status
SM400 SW80.2 Y173

(34) Always On Data link Display a


status of station
other No.3 error.
stations

N2
(38) MCR

X30 X3F X31 SW80.4


N4 M804
(39) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second
clock

N4 M804

*Data link status


SM400 SW80.4 Y174

(47) Always On Data link Display a


status of station
other No.5 error.
stations

N4
(51) MCR

X30 X3F X31 SW80.6


N6 M806
(52) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second
clock

N6 M806

*Data link status


SM400 SW80.6 Y175

(60) Always On Data link Display a


status of station
other No.7 error.
stations
X102 Y2C2

(64) Output to
the master
station
(RY2)

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5 - 16 5.4 Creating a Sequence Program
X106
D21 D1124
Data sent
(66) MOV to the
master
station

SM400
D1024 D1
Data
(69) Always On MOV received from
the master
station

Y201 Y176
Turn on
(72) this device
when the
remote input
station (RX1)
is on.
N6
(74) MCR

(75)
END
5

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5.4 Creating a Sequence Program 5 - 17
5.5 Communications Between the Master Station and
Local Station
The communications between the master station and local station are performed using the sequence programs written to the
CPU modules.

Switch operation of the demonstration machine


 Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switches of the CPU modules of both the master station and local station to the "RESET"
position (for approximately one second) to reset the CPU modules.

 Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switches of the CPU modules of both the master station and local station to the "RUN"
position.
Y170 flashes depending on the own station data link status (Data link normal).
 Turn on X102 of the local station.
When X102 in the local station program turns on, Y2C2 turns on.
When X2C2 in the master station program turns on, Y177 turns on.
• Master station side
Y177 turns on.
 Check that the values set in the initial input device (D21) of the master station and that of the local station are sent to each
other.
• Master station  Local station
(1) Set "1234" in the initial input device (D21) of the master station.
(2) Turn on X106 of the master station.
(3) Check that the initial indication device (D1) of the local station indicates "1234".
• Local station  Master station
(1) Set "5678" in the initial input device (D21) of the local station.
(2) Turn on X106 of the local station.
(3) Check that the initial indication device (D1) of the master station indicates "5678".

 Turn on the terminal block switch of the remote I/O station (AJ65BTB2-16D).
Y176 turns on when Y201 (RY1) turns on in the local station program.
* X201 (RX1) of the master station corresponds to Y201 (RY1) of the local station.

5 EXERCISE 3 (REMOTE NET MODE: PART 3)


5 - 18 5.5 Communications Between the Master Station and Local Station
6 EXERCISE 4 (REMOTE I/O NET MODE)

6.1 Features of Remote I/O Net Mode


The remote I/O net mode can be used for a system consisting of only a master station and remote I/O stations.
The remote I/O net mode enables high-speed cyclic transmissions, shortening the link scan time.
The following table lists differences in link scan time for each mode. (Values as a guide)
(When the transmission speed is 10Mbps)
Number of stations Remote I/O net mode Remote net Ver.1 mode
Remote net Ver.2 mode
Remote device net Ver.1 mode
Remote device net Ver.2 mode
8 0.61ms 1.20ms
16 0.94ms 1.57ms
32 1.61ms 2.32ms
64 2.94ms 3.81ms 6

6 EXERCISE 4 (REMOTE I/O NET MODE)


6.1 Features of Remote I/O Net Mode 6-1
6.2 System Configuration
The following figure shows the system configuration of the demonstration machine for Exercise 4.

Station No.: 0
Master (RJ61BT11)

Demonstration machine
Empty

R61P R08 R60 R60


CPU AD4 DA4

Ethernet cable
Terminating Station No.: 1 Station No.: 2
resistor Remote I/O module Remote I/O module
AJ65BTB2-16D AJ65SBTC1-32T
GOT2000

24V power
supply cable

CC-Link dedicated cable Terminating


resistor

*1 The settings of modules used in the master station and remote I/O stations and the connection methods of CC-Link dedicated cables
and 24V power supply cables are the same as those for Exercise 1.
X Y
X/Y: 100
to
10F
170 These devices are
to used for GOT
17F screens.
180

RX RY
X/Y: 200 AJ65BTB2
16 points
20F -16D
210
21F
220 These devices
AJ65SBTC
to are used for 32 points
1-32T
23F remote I/Os.
240

6 EXERCISE 4 (REMOTE I/O NET MODE)


6-2 6.2 System Configuration
6.3 Parameter Settings
Set parameters of the master station.
After setting, write the parameters to the CPU module.
For how to write parameters, refer to Page 3 - 25 Writing parameters.

6.3.1 Parameter settings (master station)


Set parameters of the master station.
For how to set parameters, refer to Page 3 - 18 Parameter settings (master station).

Operating procedure
1. After creating a module configuration, set
"Communication Mode" to "Remote I/O Net
Mode" in the "RJ61BT11 Module Parameter"
dialog box.
6
1. Set!

2. Set the CC-Link configuration as shown on the


left.

2. Set!

(To the next page)

6 EXERCISE 4 (REMOTE I/O NET MODE)


6.3 Parameter Settings 6-3
(From the previous page)

3. Set the link refresh parameters as shown on


the left.

3. Set!

4. Click the [Apply] button to close the


"RJ61BT11 Module Parameter" dialog box.

5. After setting parameters, save the project with


the file name "EX4".

4. Click!

6 EXERCISE 4 (REMOTE I/O NET MODE)


6-4 6.3 Parameter Settings
6.4 Creating a Sequence Program

Refresh device assignment


The following figure shows the refresh relationship among the CPU module, buffer memory of the master station, and remote
I/O stations.

CPU module Master station Remote I/O station (station No.1)


AJ65BTB1-16D
Devices Buffer memory
Remote input (RX)
X20F to X200 E0H RX0F to RX00
X21F to X210 E1H
E2H
E3H
E4H

6
to

15FH

Remote output (RY) Remote I/O station (station No.2)


160H AJ65SBTC1-32T
161H
Y22F to Y220 162H RY0F to RY00
Y23F to Y230 163H RY1F to RY10
164H
165H
166H
167H
168H
169H
16AH

to

1DFH

6 EXERCISE 4 (REMOTE I/O NET MODE)


6.4 Creating a Sequence Program 6-5
Setting sheet
■Station information setting sheet
Station Station type No. of Reserved/invalid station Intelligent buffer specification (word)
No. occupied specification Send Receive Automatic
stations update
1 Remote I/O station 1 No setting   
2 Remote I/O station 1 No setting   

■Device assignment table


Station Device
No. RX → (X) RY ← (Y) RWw → (D) RWr ← (D)
Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side
1 0000 to 000F 00200 to 0020F
 00210 to 0021F
2 0020 to 002F 00220 to 0022F
0030 to 003F 00230 to 0023F

6 EXERCISE 4 (REMOTE I/O NET MODE)


6-6 6.4 Creating a Sequence Program
Sequence program
The following sequence program is the same as that of Exercise 1.
Write this program to the CPU module.

Project name EX4

X30 X3F X31 SW80.0


N0 M800
(0) Module Module Own Data link
MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second Flash this


clock device
when the
own station
data link is
N0 M800 normally
operating.

SM400 SW80.0 Y171

(8)
Always On Data link
status of
Display a
station
No.1 error.
6
other
stations
SW80.0 X201 Y176

Turn on this
(11) Data link device when
status of
other RX1 of the
stations station No.1
is on.
N0
(14) MCR

X30 X3F X31 SW80.1


N1 M801
(15) Module
failure
Module
ready
Own
station
Data link
MC
status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

2 second Flash this


clock device
when the
own station
data link is
normally
N1 M801
operating.

SM400 SW80.1 Y172

Always On Data link Display a


(23) status of station
other No.2 error.
stations
SW80.1 X102 Y222

(26) Data link RY2 of the


status of station
other No.2 is on.
stations

N1
(29) MCR

END

(30)

6 EXERCISE 4 (REMOTE I/O NET MODE)


6.4 Creating a Sequence Program 6-7
6.5 Communications in Remote I/O Net Mode
Switch operation of the demonstration machine
 Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module to the RESET position (for approximately one second) to reset the
CPU module.
 Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module to the RUN position.
Y170 flashes depending on the own station data link status (Data link normal).
 Turn on the switch of the terminal block of the AJ65BTB2-16D. (RX1 turns on.)
Y176 turns on.
 Turn on X102.
The LED "Y2" of the AJ65SBTC1-32T turns on.

6 EXERCISE 4 (REMOTE I/O NET MODE)


6-8 6.5 Communications in Remote I/O Net Mode
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 Specifications of CC-Link Cables

Appendix 1.1 Maximum overall cable length


This section describes how a transmission speed and a maximum overall cable length are related when a system is
configured with products compatible with CC-Link Ver.1.10 or later and Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cables.
For the identification of the CC-Link version, refer to the installation manual issued by the CC-Link Partner Association.

Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Local station or intelligent Local station or intelligent
Master station or remote device or remote device device station device station
station station

Station-to-station cable length


Maximum overall cable length

• Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cable (a terminating resistor of 110 used)


Transmission speed Station-to-station cable length Maximum overall cable length
156kbps 20cm or more 1200m
625kbps 900m
2.5Mbps 400m
5Mbps 160m
10Mbps 100m
A

Appendix 1.2 Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated


cables
Use Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cables for the CC-Link system.
If not, the performance of the CC-Link system is not guaranteed.
For the specifications of Ver.1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cables and contact information, refer to the following.
Website of CC-Link Association: http://www.cc-link.org/

For details, refer to the CC-Link Cable Wiring Manual issued by CC-Link Partner Association.

APPENDICES
Appendix 1 Specifications of CC-Link Cables App. - 1
Appendix 2 Buffer Memory Assignment of RX, RY,
RWr, and RWw
Remote input (RX) and remote output (RY)
These buffer memory areas are used when the remote net Ver.1 mode, remote device net Ver.1 mode, or remote I/O net
mode is selected.
• In remote net Ver.1 mode, remote device net Ver.1 mode, or remote I/O net mode, data is stored in the remote input (RX)
and remote output (RY).

■Remote input (RX)


For the master station, data input from slave stations is stored.
For local stations, data input from the master station is stored.
Station Buffer Station Buffer Station Buffer Station Buffer Station Buffer
No. memory No. memory No. memory No. memory No. memory
address address address address address
1 E0H to E1H 14 FAH to FBH 27 114H to 115H 40 12EH to 12FH 53 148H to 149H
2 E2H to E3H 15 FCH to FDH 28 116H to 117H 41 130H to 131H 54 14AH to 14BH
3 E4H to E5H 16 FEH to FFH 29 118H to 119H 42 132H to 133H 55 14CH to 14DH
4 E6H to E7H 17 100H to 101H 30 11AH to 11BH 43 134H to 135H 56 14EH to 14FH
5 E8H to E9H 18 102H to 103H 31 11CH to 11DH 44 136H to 137H 57 150H to 151H
6 EAH to EBH 19 104H to 105H 32 11EH to 11FH 45 138H to 139H 58 152H to 153H
7 ECH to EDH 20 106H to 107H 33 120H to 121H 46 13AH to 13BH 59 154H to 155H
8 EEH to EFH 21 108H to 109H 34 122H to 123H 47 13CH to 13DH 60 156H to 157H
9 F0H to F1H 22 10AH to 10BH 35 124H to 125H 48 13EH to 13FH 61 158H to 159H
10 F2H to F3H 23 10CH to 10DH 36 126H to 127H 49 140H to 141H 62 15AH to 15BH
11 F4H to F5H 24 10EH to 10FH 37 128H to 129H 50 142H to 143H 63 15CH to 15DH
12 F6H to F7H 25 110H to 111H 38 12AH to 12BH 51 144H to 145H 64 15EH to 15FH
13 F8H to F9H 26 112H to 113H 39 12CH to 12DH 52 146H to 147H  

■Remote output (RY)


For the master station, data output to slave stations is stored.
For local stations, data output to the master station is stored. Data input from slave stations is also stored.
Station Buffer Station Buffer Station Buffer Station Buffer Station Buffer
No. memory No. memory No. memory No. memory No. memory
address address address address address
1 160H to 161H 14 17AH to 17BH 27 194H to 195H 40 1AEH to 1AFH 53 1C8H to 1C9H
2 162H to 163H 15 17CH to 17DH 28 196H to 197H 41 1B0H to 1B1H 54 1CAH to 1CBH
3 164H to 165H 16 17EH to 17FH 29 198H to 199H 42 1B2H to 1B3H 55 1CCH to 1CDH
4 166H to 167H 17 180H to 181H 30 19AH to 19BH 43 1B4H to 1B5H 56 1CEH to 1CFH
5 168H to 169H 18 182H to 183H 31 19CH to 19DH 44 1B6H to 1B7H 57 1D0H to 1D1H
6 16AH to 16BH 19 184H to 185H 32 19EH to 19FH 45 1B8H to 1B9H 58 1D2H to 1D3H
7 16CH to 16DH 20 186H to 187H 33 1A0H to 1A1H 46 1BAH to 1BBH 59 1D4H to 1D5H
8 16EH to 16FH 21 188H to 189H 34 1A2H to 1A3H 47 1BCH to 1BDH 60 1D6H to 1D7H
9 170H to 171H 22 18AH to 18BH 35 1A4H to 1A5H 48 1BEH to 1BFH 61 1D8H to 1D9H
10 172H to 173H 23 18CH to 18DH 36 1A6H to 1A7H 49 1C0H to 1C1H 62 1DAH to 1DBH
11 174H to 175H 24 18EH to 18FH 37 1A8H to 1A9H 50 1C2H to 1C3H 63 1DCH to 1DDH
12 176H to 177H 25 190H to 191H 38 1AAH to 1ABH 51 1C4H to 1C5H 64 1DEH to 1DFH
13 178H to 179H 26 192H to 193H 39 1ACH to 1ADH 52 1C6H to 1C7H  

APPENDICES
App. - 2 Appendix 2 Buffer Memory Assignment of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw
Ver.2-compatible remote input (RX) and Ver.2-compatible remote output (RY)
These buffer memory areas are used when the remote net Ver.2 mode or remote device net Ver.2 mode is selected.
In remote net Ver.2 mode, data is stored in the remote input (RX) and remote output (RY) in all slave stations (including Ver.1-
compatible slave stations).
For the master station, data input from slave stations is stored.
For local stations, data input from the master station is stored.

■Storage location for each station


The storage locations change depending on the number of occupied stations and extended cyclic settings in slave stations.
The storage locations for each station can be checked using Slave station offset, size information (Un\G992 to Un\G1503).
••• The last two bits of RX/RY cannot be used for communications between the master station and a local station.
(In the example below, RYEE and RYEF cannot be used.)

Remote I/O station Remote I/O station


(station No.: 1, number of (station No.: 2, number of Local station Local station
occupied stations: 1, number occupied stations: 1, (station No.: 3, number of occupied (station No.: 7, number of occupied
of remote I/O station points: number of remote I/O stations: 4, extended cyclic setting: stations: 4, extended cyclic setting:
Master station 16 points) station points: 32 points) double) double)

Address Remote input (RX) Remote output (RY) Address Remote output (RY) Address
Station 4000H RX F to RX 0 Station Station
X0F to X00 RY F to RY 0 4200H RY F to RY 0 4200H
No.1
No.1 No.1
Station 4001H RX 1F to RX 10 X1F to X10 RY 1F to RY 10 4201H Station RY 1F to RY 10 4201H Station
No.2 4002H RX 2F to RX 20 X2F to X20 RY 2F to RY 20 4202H No.2 RY 2F to RY 20 4202H No.2
4003H RX 3F to RX 30 RY 3F to RY 30 4203H RY 3F to RY 30 4203H
4004H RX 4F to RX 40 RY 4F to RY 40 4204H RY 4F to RY 40 4204H
Station Station Station
No.3 No.3 No.3
400FH RX FF to RX F0 RY FF to RY F0 420FH RY FF to RY F0 420FH
4010H RX 10D to RX 100 RY 10D to RY 100 4210H RY 10D to RY 100 4210H
4011H RX 11F to RX 110 RY 11F to RY 110 4211H RY 11F to RY 110 4211H
4012H RX 12F to RX 120 RY 12F to RY 120 4212H RY 12F to RY 120 4212H
Station Station Station
No.7 No.7 No.7
400DH RX 1DF to RX 1D0 RY 1DF to RY 1D0 421DH RY 1DF to RY 1D0 421DH
400EH RX 1EF to RX 1E0 RY 1EF to RY 1E0 421EH RY 1EF to RY 1E0 421EH

41FCH RX1FCF to RX1FC0 RY1FCF to RY1FC0 43FCH RY1FCF to RY1FC0 43FCH


41FDH RX1FDF to RX1FD0 RY1FDF to RY1FD0 43FDH RY1FDF to RY1FD0 43FDH
41FEH RX1FEF to RX1FE0 RY1FEF to RY1FE0 43FEH RY1FEF to RY1FE0 43FEH
41FFH RX1FFF to RX1FF0 RY1FFF to RY1FF0 43FFH RY1FFF to RY1FF0 43FFH

APPENDICES
Appendix 2 Buffer Memory Assignment of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw App. - 3
Remote register (RWw) and remote register (RWr)
These buffer memory areas are used when the remote net Ver.1 mode or remote device net Ver.1 mode is selected.
• In remote net Ver.1 mode or remote device net Ver.1 mode, data is stored in the remote register (RWr and RWw).

■Remote register (RWr)


For the master station, data received from slave stations is stored.
For local stations, data received from the master station is stored.
Station Buffer Station Buffer Station Buffer Station Buffer Station Buffer
No. memory No. memory No. memory No. memory No. memory
address address address address address
1 2E0H to 2E3H 14 314H to 317H 27 348H to 34BH 40 37CH to 37FH 53 3B0H to 3B3H
2 2E4H to 2E7H 15 318H to 31BH 28 34CH to 34FH 41 380H to 383H 54 3B4H to 3B7H
3 2E8H to 2EBH 16 31CH to 31FH 29 350H to 353H 42 384H to 387H 55 3B8H to 3BBH
4 2ECH to 2EFH 17 320H to 323H 30 354H to 357H 43 388H to 38BH 56 3BCH to 3BFH
5 2F0H to 2F3H 18 324H to 327H 31 358H to 35BH 44 38CH to 38FH 57 3C0H to 3C3H
6 2F4H to 2F7H 19 328H to 32BH 32 35CH to 35FH 45 390H to 393H 58 3C4H to 3C7H
7 2F8H to 2FBH 20 32CH to 32FH 33 360H to 363H 46 394H to 397H 59 3C8H to 3CBH
8 2FCH to 2FFH 21 330H to 333H 34 364H to 367H 47 398H to 39BH 60 3CCH to 3CFH
9 300H to 303H 22 334H to 337H 35 368H to 36BH 48 39CH to 39FH 61 3D0H to 3D3H
10 304H to 307H 23 338H to 33BH 36 36CH to 36FH 49 3A0H to 3A3H 62 3D4H to 3D7H
11 308H to 30BH 24 33CH to 33FH 37 370H to 373H 50 3A4H to 3A7H 63 3D8H to 3DBH
12 30CH to 30FH 25 340H to 343H 38 374H to 377H 51 3A8H to 3ABH 64 3DCH to 3DFH
13 310H to 313H 26 344H to 347H 39 378H to 37BH 52 3ACH to 3AFH  

■Remote register (RWw)


For the master station, data sent to slave stations is stored.
For local stations, data sent to the master station is stored. Data received from slave stations is also stored.
Station Buffer Station Buffer Station Buffer Station Buffer Station Buffer
No. memory No. memory No. memory No. memory No. memory
address address address address address
1 1E0H to 1E3H 14 214H to 217H 27 248H to 24BH 40 27CH to 27FH 53 2B0H to 2B3H
2 1E4H to 1E7H 15 218H to 21BH 28 24CH to 24FH 41 280H to 283H 54 2B4H to 2B7H
3 1E8H to 1EBH 16 21CH to 21FH 29 250H to 253H 42 284H to 287H 55 2B8H to 2BBH
4 1ECH to 1EFH 17 220H to 223H 30 254H to 257H 43 288H to 28BH 56 2BCH to 2BFH
5 1F0H to 1F3H 18 224H to 227H 31 258H to 25BH 44 28CH to 28FH 57 2C0H to 2C3H
6 1F4H to 1F7H 19 228H to 22BH 32 25CH to 25FH 45 290H to 293H 58 2C4H to 2C7H
7 1F8H to 1FBH 20 22CH to 22FH 33 260H to 263H 46 294H to 297H 59 2C8H to 2CBH
8 1FCH to 1FFH 21 230H to 233H 34 264H to 267H 47 298H to 29BH 60 2CCH to 2CFH
9 200H to 203H 22 234H to 237H 35 268H to 26BH 48 29CH to 29FH 61 2D0H to 2D3H
10 204H to 207H 23 238H to 23BH 36 26CH to 26FH 49 2A0H to 2A3H 62 2D4H to 2D7H
11 208H to 20BH 24 23CH to 23FH 37 270H to 273H 50 2A4H to 2A7H 63 2D8H to 2DBH
12 20CH to 20FH 25 240H to 243H 38 274H to 277H 51 2A8H to 2ABH 64 2DCH to 2DFH
13 210H to 213H 26 244H to 247H 39 278H to 27BH 52 2ACH to 2AFH  

APPENDICES
App. - 4 Appendix 2 Buffer Memory Assignment of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw
Ver.2-compatible remote register (RWw) and Ver.2-compatible remote register (RWr)
These buffer memory areas are used when the remote net Ver.2 mode or remote device net Ver.2 mode is selected.
In remote net Ver.2 mode or remote device net Ver.2 mode, data is stored in the remote register (RWr/RWw) of all slave
stations (including Ver.1-compatible slave stations).

■Storage location for each station


The storage locations change depending on the number of occupied stations and extended cyclic settings in slave stations.
The storage locations for each station can be checked using Slave station offset, size information (Un\G992 to Un\G1503).

Ex.
Remote device station
(station No.: 1, number of Local station
occupied stations: 1, extended (station No.: 2, number of occupied stations: 1,
Master station cyclic setting: single) extended cyclic setting: quadruple)

Address Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWr) Address
4400H RWw 0 RWw 0 RWr 0 4C00H
For station 4401H RWw 1 RWw 1 RWr 1 4C01H For station
No.1 4402H RWw 2 RWw 2 RWr 2 4C02H No.1
4403H RWw 3 RWw 3 RWr 3 4C03H
4404H RWw 4 RWr 4 4C04H
4405H RWw 5 RWr 5 4C05H
4406H RWw 6 RWr 6 4C06H
4407H RWw 7 RWr 7 4C07H
4408H RWw 8 RWr 8 4C08H
4409H RWw 9 RWr 9 4C09H
440AH RWw A RWr A 4C0AH
For station 440BH RWw B RWr B 4C0BH For station
No.2 440CH RWw C RWr C 4C0CH No.2
440DH RWw D RWr D 4C0DH
440EH RWw E RWr E 4C0EH
440FH RWw F
RWw 10
RWr F
RWr 10
4C0FH
A
4410H 4C10H
4411H RWw 11 RWr 11 4C11H
4412H RWw 12 RWr 12 4C12H
4413H RWw 13 RWr 13 4C13H

4BFCH RWw 7FC RWr 7FC 53FCH


4BFDH RWw 7FD RWr 7FD 53FDH
4BFEH RWw 7FE RWr 7FE 53FEH
4BFFH RWw 7FF RWr 7FF 53FFH

APPENDICES
Appendix 2 Buffer Memory Assignment of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw App. - 5
Link special relay (SB)
This area stores bit (on/off) data indicating the data link status.
Buffer memory addresses 5E0H to 5FFH correspond to link special relay areas SB0000 to SB01FF.
For details on link special relay areas (SB0000 to SB01FF), refer to Appendix 3.
The following table lists the relationship between buffer memory addresses 5E0H to 5FFH and link special relay areas
SB0000 to SB01FF.
Address b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
5E0 H F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5E1 H 1F 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
5E2 H 2F 2E 2D 2C 2B 2A 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
5E3 H 3F 3E 3D 3C 3B 3A 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30
5E4 H 4F 4E 4D 4C 4B 4A 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
5E5 H 5F 5E 5D 5C 5B 5A 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50
5E6 H 6F 6E 6D 6C 6B 6A 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
5E7 H 7F 7E 7D 7C 7B 7A 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70
5E8 H 8F 8E 8D 8C 8B 8A 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80
5E9 H 9F 9E 9D 9C 9B 9A 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90
5EAH AF AE AD AC AB AA A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
5EBH BF BE BD BC BB BA B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
5ECH CF CE CD CC CB CA C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
5EDH DF DE DD DC DB DA D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
5EEH EF EE ED EC EB EA E9 E8 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0
5EF H FF FE FD FC FB FA F9 F8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
5F0 H 10F 10E 10D 10C 10B 10A 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100
5F1 H 11F 11E 11D 11C 11B 11A 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110
5F2 H 12F 12E 12D 12C 12B 12A 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120
5F3 H 13F 13E 13D 13C 13B 13A 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130
5F4 H 14F 14E 14D 14C 14B 14A 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140
5F5 H 15F 15E 15D 15C 15B 15A 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150
5F6 H 16F 16E 16D 16C 16B 16A 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160
5F7 H 17F 17E 17D 17C 17B 17A 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170
5F8 H 18F 18E 18D 18C 18B 18A 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180
5F9 H 19F 19E 19D 19C 19B 19A 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190
5FA H 1AF 1AE 1AD 1AC 1AB 1AA 1A9 1A8 1A7 1A6 1A5 1A4 1A3 1A2 1A1 1A0
5FB H 1BF 1BE 1BD 1BC 1BB 1BA 1B9 1B8 1B7 1B6 1B5 1B4 1B3 1B2 1B1 1B0
5FCH 1CF 1CE 1CD 1CC 1CB 1CA 1C9 1C8 1C7 1C6 1C5 1C4 1C3 1C2 1C1 1C0
5FDH 1DF 1DE 1DD 1DC 1DB 1DA 1D9 1D8 1D7 1D6 1D5 1D4 1D3 1D2 1D1 1D0
5FE H 1EF 1EE 1ED 1EC 1EB 1EA 1E9 1E8 1E7 1E6 1E5 1E4 1E3 1E2 1E1 1E0
5FF H 1FF 1FE 1FD 1FC 1FB 1FA 1F9 1F8 1F7 1F6 1F5 1F4 1F3 1F2 1F1 1F0

Link special register (SW)


This area stores word data indicating the data link status.
Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFH correspond to link special register areas SW0000 to SW01FF.
For details on link special register areas (SW0000 to 01FF), refer to Appendix 3.

APPENDICES
App. - 6 Appendix 2 Buffer Memory Assignment of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link
Special Register Areas/Error Codes

Appendix 3.1 List of link special relay (SB) areas


The link special relay (SB) is turned on/off depending on various factors during data link. Any error status of the data link can
be checked by using and monitoring it in the program.

Application of the link special relay (SB)


By using the link special relay (SB), the status of CC-Link system can be checked from HMI (Human Machine Interfaces) as
well as the engineering tool.

Refresh of the link special relay (SB)


To use the link special relay (SB), set them in "Link Refresh Settings" in "Basic Settings" so that they are refreshed to the
devices or labels of the CPU module.

Ranges turned on/off by users and by the system


The following ranges correspond to when the link special relay (SB) areas are assigned from SB0000 to SB01FF.
• Turned on/off by users: SB0000 to SB001F
• Turned on/off by the system: SB0020 to SB01FF

List of link special relay (SB) areas


The following table lists the link special relay (SB) areas when they are assigned from SB0000 to SB01FF.
When a standby master station is used, refer to the respective columns under "Availability" in the table as explained below.
• When a standby master station is operating as a master station: "Master station" column
A
• When a standby master station is operating as a standby master station: "Local station" column

Do not turn on or off areas whose numbers are not on the following list. Doing so may cause malfunction of
the programmable controller system.

No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not


available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SB0000 Data link restart Restarts the data link that has been stopped by SB0002.   
Off: Not instructed
On: Instructed
SB0001 Refresh instruction at Refreshes cyclic data after data link control is transferred to the standby   
standby master master station.
switching Off: Not instructed
On: Instructed
SB0002 Data link stop Stops the data link of the own station.   
Note that if this relay is instructed to the master station, the entire system
will stop.
Off: Not instructed
On: Instructed
SB0003 Refresh instruction Refreshes cyclic data after parameter setting is changed by the RLPASET   
when changing instruction.
parameters by the Off: Not instructed (refresh stopped)
dedicated instruction On: Instructed (refresh started/continued)

APPENDICES
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes App. - 7
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SB0004 Temporary error invalid Determines the stations specified by SW0003 to SW0007 as a temporary   
request error invalid station.
Off: Not requested
On: Requested
SB0005 Temporary error invalid Cancels the temporary error invalid station setting configured for the   
cancel request stations specified by SW0003 to SW0007.
Off: Not requested
On: Requested
SB0007 Master station Clears a master station duplication error. *1  
duplication error Off: Not instructed
cancel request On: Instructed
SB0008 Line test request Executes a line test to the station specified by SW0008.   
Off: Not requested
On: Requested
SB000B Transmission speed Executes a transmission speed test. *1  
test request Off: Not requested
On: Requested
SB000C Forced master Forcibly transfers data link control from the standby master station during   
switching data link control to the master station that stands by for system down of the
standby master station.
Off: Not requested
On: Requested
SB000D Remote device station Performs an initial processing using the information registered by the   
initialization procedure initialization procedure registration using an engineering tool.
registration instruction While SB000D is on, the remote I/O and remote registers are stopped to
be refreshed.
Off: Not instructed
On: Instructed
SB0020 Module status Stores the communication status between the master/local module and   
CPU module.
Off: Normal
On: Error
SB0040 Data link restart Stores whether the data link restart instruction has been accepted.   
acceptance Off: Not accepted
On: Accepted
SB0041 Data link restart Stores whether the data link restart instruction has been completed.   
completion Off: Not completed
On: Started
SB0042 Refresh instruction Stores whether the refresh instruction at standby master switching has   
acceptance status at been accepted.
standby master Off: Not executed
switching On: Accepted
SB0043 Refresh instruction Stores whether the refresh instruction at standby master switching has   
completion status at been completed.
standby master Off: Not executed
switching On: Switched
SB0044 Data link stop Stores whether the data link stop instruction has been accepted.   
acceptance Off: Not accepted
On: Accepted
SB0045 Data link stop Stores whether the data link stop instruction has been completed.   
completion Off: Not completed
On: Stopped
SB0046 Forced master Stores whether Forced master switching (SB000C) can be executed. *2  
switching enable Off:Cannot be executed
status On: Can be executed
SB0048 Temporary error invalid Stores whether the remote station temporary error invalid instruction has   
acceptance status been accepted.
Off: Not executed
On: Accepted

APPENDICES
App. - 8 Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SB0049 Temporary error invalid Stores whether the remote station temporary error invalid instruction has   
completion status been completed.
Off: Not executed
On: A temporary error invalid station determined
SB004A Temporary error invalid Stores whether the remote station temporary error invalid cancel   
cancel acceptance instruction has been accepted.
status Off: Not executed
On: Accepted
SB004B Temporary error invalid Stores whether the remote station temporary error invalid cancel   
cancel completion instruction has been completed.
status Off: Not executed
On: Temporary error invalid station setting canceled
SB004C Line test acceptance Stores whether a line test request has been accepted.   
status Off: Not executed
On: Accepted
SB004D Line test completion Stores whether a line test has been completed.   
status Off: Not executed
On: Completed
SB0050 Offline test status Stores whether an offline test is being executed.   
Off: Not executed
On: In process
SB0057 Master station Stores whether a master station duplication error cancel request has been   
duplication error accepted.
cancel acceptance Off: Not accepted
On: Accepted
SB0058 Master station Stores whether a master station duplication error cancel request has been   
duplication error completed.
cancel completion Off: Not completed
On: Completed A
SB005A Master switching Stores whether the standby master station has detected the system down  *2 
request acceptance of the master station and has accepted a request of switching from standby
master operation to master operation.
Off: Not accepted
On: Accepted
SB005B Master switching Stores whether the standby master station has been switched as a master  *2 
request completion station.
Off: Not completed
On: Completed
SB005C Forced master Stores whether a forced master switching request has been accepted.   
switching request Off: Not accepted
acceptance On: Accepted
SB005D Forced master Stores whether a forced master switching request has been completed.   
switching request Off: Not completed
completion On: Completed
SB005E Execution status of Stores whether the initialization procedure is being performed.   
remote device station Off: Not executed
initialization procedure On: In process
SB005F Completion status of Stores whether the initialization procedure has been completed.   
remote device station Off: Not completed
initialization procedure On: Completed
SB0060 Mode of own station Stores the mode setting status of the own station.   
Off: Online
On: Mode other than online
SB0061 Type of own station Stores the station type of the own station.   
Off: Master station (station number: 0)
On: Local station (station number: 1 to 64)
SB0062 Standby master station Stores whether the own station has been set as a standby master station.   
setting status of own Off: Not set
station On: Set

APPENDICES
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes App. - 9
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SB0065 Input data status of Stores the setting status of "Input Data from Data Link Faulty Station"   
own data link faulty configured for the own station.
station Off: Clear
On: Hold
SB0066 Number of own station Stores the number of occupied stations of the own station. *1  
occupied stations ■1 station occupied
SB0067
• SB0066: OFF
• SB0067: OFF
■2 stations occupied
• SB0066: OFF
• SB0067: ON
■3 stations occupied
• SB0066: ON
• SB0067: ON
■4 stations occupied
• SB0066: ON
• SB0067: OFF
SB006D Parameter setting Stores whether the parameters have been correctly set. *1  
status Off: Normal
On: Setting incorrect (An error code is stored in SW0068.)
SB006E Operation status of Stores whether data link with other stations is being performed.   
own station Off: In process
On: Not performed
SB006F Setting status of block Stores whether the block guarantee of cyclic data per station has been set   
guarantee of cyclic to the own station.
data per station Off: Not set
On: Set
SB0070 Master station Stores the data link status.   
information Off: Data link control by the master station
On: Data link control by the standby master station
SB0071 Standby master station Stores whether a standby master station exists.   
information Off: Absent
On: Present
SB0072 Scan mode setting Stores the setting status of the scan mode.   
information Off: Link scan is performed asynchronously with a sequence scan.
On: Link scan is performed synchronously with a sequence scan.
SB0073 Data link setting when Indicates the data link status specified by the parameter when CPU is   
CPU is down down.
Off: Data link stopped
On: Data link continued
SB0074 Reserved station Stores whether a reserved station has been specified by the parameter.   
specification status Off: Not specified
On: Specified (The set station number is stored in SW0074 to SW0077.)
Depending on the link refresh timing, SB0074 may be updated with the
time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Reserved station
specification status (SW0074 to SW0077).
SB0075 Error invalid station Stores whether an error invalid station has been specified using the   
specification status parameter.
Off: Not specified
On: Specified (The set station number is stored in SW0078 to SW007B.)
Depending on the link refresh timing, SB0075 may be updated with the
time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Error invalid
station specification status (SW0078 to SW007B).
SB0076 Temporary error invalid Stores whether a temporary error invalid station has been set.   
station setting Off: Not set
information On: Set (The set station number is stored in SW007C to SW007F.)
Depending on the link refresh timing, SB0076 may be updated with the
time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Temporary error
invalid status (SW007C to SW007F).
SB0077 Parameter receive Stores whether parameters have been received from the master station.   
status Off: Received
On: Not received

APPENDICES
App. - 10 Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SB0079 Master station return Stores whether "Master Station" or "Master Station (Duplex Function)" has   
specification been set in "Station Type" in the module parameter window.
information Off: Master station
On: Master station (duplex function)
SB007A Standby master station Stores whether the own station has ever operated as a standby master   
operation history of station.
own station Off: Has no history of operating as a standby master station
On: Has a history of operating as a standby master station
SB007B Master/standby master Stores whether the own station is operating as a master station or standby   
operation status of master station.
own station Off:The own station is operating as a master station.
On:The own station is operating as a standby master station.
SB007C Slave station refresh/ Stores the parameter setting status of output data in case of CPU STOP.   
compulsory clear Off: Receives remote output (RY).
setting status in case On: Sends 0 data.
of programmable
controller CPU STOP
SB0080 Data link status of Stores the communication status with slave stations.   
other stations Off: All stations normal
On: Faulty station found (The faulty station number is stored in SW0080
to SW0083.)
It takes maximum of six seconds for Data link status of other stations
(SB0080) to turn on after a slave station connected to the master station or
local station becomes faulty.
SB0081 Watchdog timer error Stores whether a watchdog timer error has occurred in other stations.   
status of other stations Off: No error
On: Error
Depending on the link refresh timing, SB0081 may be updated with the
time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Watchdog timer
error occurrence status of other stations (SW0084 to SW0087). A
SB0082 Fuse blown status of Stores whether a fuse blown error has occurred in other stations. (SW0088   
other stations to SW008B)
Off: No error
On: Error
Depending on the link refresh timing, SB0082 may be updated with the
time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Fuse blown
status of other stations (SW0088 to SW008B).
SB0083 Switch change status Detects whether the setting of setting switches of other stations during data   
of other stations link has been changed.
Off: No change
On: Changed
Depending on the link refresh timing, SB0083 may be updated with the
time difference of one sequence scan from the update of Switch change
status of other stations (SW008C to SW008F).
SB0090 Line status of own Stores whether the line to the own station is normally operating.   
station Off: Normal
On: Error (disconnected)
SB0094 Transient transmission Stores whether a transient transmission error has occurred.   
status Off: No error
On: Error
SB0095 Master stations Stores whether the master station is normally performing transient   
transient transmission transmission.
status Off: Normal
On: Error
SB00B4 Standby master station Stores the result of the line test 1.   
test result Off: Normal
On: Error
SB0160 Remote register use Stores whether the use of remote registers is prohibited.   
prohibited status Off: Available
On: Use prohibited

APPENDICES
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes App. - 11
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SB0184 Transmission speed Stores the result of the transmission speed test to the standby master   
test result of standby station.
master station Off: Normal (same transmission speed as the master station) or no
response from the module
On: Error (different transmission speed from the master station)
SB0185 Transmission speed Stores whether Transmission speed test request (SB000B) has been   
test acceptance status accepted.
Off: Not accepted
On: Accepted
SB0186 Transmission speed Stores whether a transmission speed test has been completed.   
test completion status Off: Not completed
On: Completed

*1 Available for stations with the station number 0 only.


*2 Available for the standby master station only.

APPENDICES
App. - 12 Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes
Appendix 3.2 List of link special register (SW) areas
The link special register (SW) stores the information during data link. Error locations and causes can be checked by the using
and monitoring the link special register (SW) in programs.

Application of the link special register (SW)


By using the link special register (SW), the status of CC-Link system can be checked from HMI (Human Machine Interfaces)
as well as the engineering tool.

Refresh of the link special register (SW)


To use the link special register (SW), set them in "Link Refresh Settings" under "Basic Settings" so that they are refreshed to
the devices or labels of the CPU module.

Range where data are stored by users and range where data are stored by the system
The following ranges correspond to when the link special register (SW) areas are assigned from SW0000 to SW01FF.
• Stored by users: SW0000 to SW001F
• Stored by the system: SW0020 to SW01FF

List of link special register (SW) areas


The following table lists the link special register (SW) areas when they are assigned from SW0000 to SW01FF.
When a standby master station is used, refer to the respective columns under "Availability" in the table as explained below.
• When a standby master station is operating as a master station: "Master station" column
• When a standby master station is operating as a standby master station: "Local station" column

Do not write any data to an area whose number is not on the following list. Doing so may cause malfunction of
the programmable controller system.
A
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SW0003 Multiple Selects whether to specify multiple temporary error invalid stations.   
temporary error 00: Multiple stations set in SW0004 to SW0007 specified
invalid station 01 to 64:A single station specified from 1 to 64
specification (The number represents the station number to be set as a temporary error
invalid station.)
SW0004 Temporary error Specifies a temporary error invalid station.   
to invalid station 0: Temporary error invalid station not specified
SW0007 specification 1: Temporary error invalid station specified

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW0004 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW0005 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW0006 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW0007 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

The stations need not be set by the number of occupied stations.


Error invalid stations, reserved stations, station with the end station number, and
stations later than that are excepted.
SW0008 Line test station Sets a station number where the line test is executed.   
setting 0: Entire system (executed to all stations)
01 to 64:Specified station
Default: 0

APPENDICES
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes App. - 13
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SW0009 Monitoring time Sets monitoring time when dedicated instructions are used.   
setting Default: 10 (seconds) (value = 0)
Setting range: 1 to 360 (seconds)
If a value outside the range is set, the monitoring time will be 360 seconds.
When SW000B is set, the time until a dedicated instruction fails is as follows:
(Number of retries + 1)  monitoring time
SW000A CPU monitoring Sets the monitoring time of CPU response when the CPU module is accessed   
time setting through transient transmission.
Default: 90 (seconds) (value = 0)
Setting range: 1 to 3600 (seconds)
If a value outside the range is set, the monitoring time will be 3600 seconds.
SW000B Dedicated Sets the number of retries of when dedicated instructions are used.   
instruction retry Default: 0 (No retry)
count setting Setting range: 0 to 7 (time)
If a value outside the range is set, the number of times will be 7.
SW0014 Specification of Specifies a station where an initial processing is performed using the   
to remote device information registered by the initialization procedure registration using an
SW0017 station to be engineering tool.
initialized 0: Initial processing not performed
1: Initial processing performed

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW0014 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW0015 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW0016 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW0017 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

The stations need not be set by the number of occupied stations.


Error invalid stations, reserved stations, station with the end station number, and
stations later than that are excepted.
SW0020 Module status Stores the communication status between the master/local module and CPU   
module.
0: Normal
Values other than 0:Error code ( User's manual for the CPU module used)
SW0041 Data link restart Stores whether the data link restart instruction using SB0000 has been normally   
result completed.
0: Normal
Values other than 0:Error code ( Page App. - 23 List of error codes)
SW0043 Refresh Stores whether the refresh instruction at standby master switching has been   
instruction at normally completed.
standby master 0: Normal
switching result Values other than 0:Error code ( Page App. - 23 List of error codes)
SW0045 Data link stop Stores whether the data link stop instruction using SB0002 has been normally   
result completed.
0: Normal
Values other than 0:Error code ( Page App. - 23 List of error codes)
SW0049 Temporary error Stores whether the temporary error invalid station specification has been   
invalid station normally completed.
specification 0: Normal
result Values other than 0:Error code ( Page App. - 23 List of error codes)
SW004B Temporary error Stores whether the temporary error invalid station setting has been normally   
invalid station canceled.
specification 0: Normal
cancel result Values other than 0:Error code ( Page App. - 23 List of error codes)
SW004D Line test result Stores the result of a line test.   
0: Normal
Values other than 0:Error code ( Page App. - 23 List of error codes)

APPENDICES
App. - 14 Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SW0057 Master station Stores whether a master station duplication error cancel request has been   
duplication error normally completed.
cancel result 0: Normal completion
Values other than 0:Error code ( Page App. - 23 List of error codes)
SW0058 Detailed LED Stores the details of the LED display status.   
display status 0: Off
1: On
b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0

LINE (ERROR): A cable is disconnected or the transmission path


has been affected by noise.
TIME (ERROR): Responses cannot be received from any station
due to the cable being disconnected or
the transmission path being affected by noise.
PRM (ERROR): Invalid parameter value

M/S (ERROR): Multiple master stations exist on the same line.

SW (ERROR): Error in switch settings

S MST: The station is operating as a standby master station.

MST: The station is operating as a master station.

ERR.: Error

RUN: The module is operating normally.

• The use of b11 is prohibited.


• The ERR. LED on the master/local module turns on when a bit among b4 to
b8 and b14 is on.
SW0059 Transmission Stores the transmission speed setting status. Auto-tracking (b15) is enabled   
speed setting only at local stations.
0: Not set
1: Set

b15 b14 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 to 0 0 0 0

10Mbps A
5Mbps

2.5Mbps

625kbps

156kbps

Auto-tracking

SW005B Transmission Stores the transmission speed operation status. The bit "During auto-tracking"   
speed operation (b15) is enabled only at local stations.
status 0: Not in operation
1: In operation

b15 b14 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 to 0 0 0 0

10Mbps

5Mbps

2.5Mbps

625kbps

156kbps

During auto-tracking

APPENDICES
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes App. - 15
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SW005C Detailed LED Stores the detailed display status of the module LED.   
display status (2) 0: Off
1: On

b15 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b0


0 … 0
Transmission speed setting
156kbps
Transmission speed setting
625kbps
Transmission speed setting
2.5Mbps
Transmission speed setting
5Mbps
Transmission speed setting
10Mbps

• The use of b0 to b6 is prohibited.


SW005D Forced master Stores whether the forced master switching instruction using SB000C has been   
switching normally completed.
instruction result 0: Normal
Values other than 0:Error code ( Page App. - 23 List of error codes)
SW005F Remote device Stores whether the initialization procedure registration instruction using SB000D   
station has been normally completed.
initialization 0: Normal
procedure Values other than 0:Error code ( Page App. - 23 List of error codes)
registration
instruction result
SW0060 Mode setting Stores the mode setting status.   
status 0: Online (remote net mode)
1: Online (remote I/O net mode)
2: Offline
3: Line test 1
4: Line test 2
6: Hardware test
C: Online (remote device net mode)
SW0061 Station number of Stores the current own station's station number.   
own station 0: Master station
1 to 64:Local station
SW0062 Module operating Stores the module operation setting configured using the parameter.   
status b15 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 to 0 0 0 0

Station type
0: Master station/local station
1: Standby master station
Master station duplex function
0: Disable
1: Enable
Input data from data link faulty station
0: Clear
1: Hold
Number of occupied stations
00: 1 station occupied
10: 2 station occupied
11: 3 station occupied
01: 4 station occupied
Setting Method of Basic/Application Settings
0: Parameter Editor
1: Program
Output mode upon CPU STOPcase of
programmable controller CPU STOP
0: Refresh to remote output (RY)
1: Send 0 data to remote output (RY)
Extended cyclic setting
00: Single
01: Double
10: Quadruple
11: Octuple
Station-based block data assurance
0: Disable
1: Enable

SW0064 Number of retries Stores the set number of retries upon an abnormal response.   
information 1 to 7 (time)

APPENDICES
App. - 16 Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SW0065 Number of Stores the set number of automatic return stations in one link scan.   
automatic return 1 to 10 (station)
stations
SW0067 Parameter Stores the information of the setting method basic/application settings.   
information 0H:Parameter editor
3H:Program
SW0068 Parameter status Stores whether the parameters have been correctly set.   
of own station 0: Normal
Values other than 0:Error code ( Page App. - 23 List of error codes)
SW0069 Installation status Stores whether unique station numbers have been assigned for modules and   
whether parameter settings match with connected module status.
0: Normal
Values other than 0:Error code ( Page App. - 23 List of error codes)
Error details are stored in SW0098 to SW009B and SW009C to SW009F.
This item is checked, and the result is stored only at link startup.
SW006D Maximum link Stores the maximum link scan time.   
scan time (unit: 1ms)
SW006E Current link scan Stores the current link scan time.   
time (unit: 1ms)
SW006F Minimum link scan Stores the minimum link scan time.   
time (unit: 1ms)
SW0070 Total number of Stores the end station number set using the parameter.   
stations 1 to 64 (station)
SW0071 Maximum Stores the maximum station number during data link (station number set using   
communication the station number setting switches).
station number 1 to 64 (station)
Reserved stations are excepted.
SW0072 Number of
connected
Stores the number of modules performing data link.
Reserved stations are excepted.
  
A
modules
SW0073 Standby master Stores the standby master station number.   
station number 1 to 64 (station)
SW0074 Reserved station Stores whether a station has been set as a reserved station.   
to specification 0: A station other than a reserved station
SW0077 status 1: Reserved station

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW0074 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW0075 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW0076 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW0077 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on.
The station with the end station number and stations later than that are
excepted.
SW0078 Error invalid Stores whether a station has been set as an error invalid station.   
to station 0: A station other than an error invalid station
SW007B specification 1: Error invalid station
status
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
SW0078 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW0079 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW007A 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW007B 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on.
Reserved stations, station with the end station number, and stations later than
that are excepted.

APPENDICES
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes App. - 17
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SW007C Temporary error Stores whether a station is in the temporary error invalid status.   
to invalid status 0: Normal
SW007F 1: Temporary error invalid status

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW007C 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW007D 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW007E 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW007F 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations.


Error invalid stations, reserved stations, station with the end station number, and
stations later than that are excepted.
SW0080 Data link status of Stores the data link status of each station.   
to other stations 0: Normal
SW0083 1: Data link error

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW0080 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW0081 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW0082 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW0083 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations.


It takes maximum of six seconds for this register to turn on after a slave station
connected to the master station or local station becomes faulty. The time until
this signal turns on differs depending on the system configuration and error
status.
Temporary error invalid stations, error invalid stations, reserved stations, station
with the end station number, and stations later than that are excepted.
SW0084 Watchdog timer Stores whether a watchdog timer error has occurred.   
to error occurrence 0: No watchdog timer error
SW0087 status of other 1: Watchdog timer error
stations
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
SW0084 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW0085 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW0086 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW0087 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on.
Reserved stations, station with the end station number, and stations later than
that are excepted.
SW0088 Fuse blown status Stores whether a fuse blown error has occurred.   
to of other stations 0: Normal
SW008B 1: Fuse blown

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW0088 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW0089 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW008A 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW008B 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations.


Reserved stations, station with the end station number, and stations later than
that are excepted.

APPENDICES
App. - 18 Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SW008C Switch change Stores whether the setting of switches of other stations during data link has   
to status of other been changed.
SW008F stations 0: No change
1: Changed

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW008C 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW008D 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW008E 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW008F 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on.
Reserved stations, station with the end station number, and stations later than
that are excepted.
SW0090 Line status Stores the line status.   
0: Normal
1: Data link disabled (disconnected)
SW0094 Transient Stores whether a transient transmission error has occurred.   
to transmission 0: No transient transmission error
SW0097 status 1: Transient transmission error

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW0094 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW0095 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW0096 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW0097 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49

A
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on.
Reserved stations, station with the end station number, and stations later than
that are excepted.
SW0098 Station number Stores whether station numbers are unique when the start station numbers of   
to overlap status modules are different.
SW009B 0: Normal
1: Station number in use (start station number only)

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW0098 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW0099 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW009A 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW009B 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

Reserved stations, station with the end station number, and stations later than
that are excepted.
Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on. This item is
checked, and the result is stored only upon data link start and the change of a
parameter.
For a slave station with the transmission speed auto-tracking setting, whether
the station number is already used for other stations may not be detected.
When the station number of a station is the same as that of the standby master
station, the status cannot be detected.

APPENDICES
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes App. - 19
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SW009C Installation/ Stores the matching statuses such as the matching of CC-Link versions   
to parameter between the parameter settings and the modules on slave stations.
SW009F matching status ■ The station types do not match. (This mismatch occurs in the following
combinations of station types.)

Installation Parameter
Remote device station Remote I/O station
Intelligent device station Remote I/O station
Remote device station

■The number of occupied stations do not match (installation > parameter).


■ The extended cyclic settings do not match.
■The remote station versions do not match between the parameter settings and
installed modules.
0: Normal
1: Mismatch error

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW009C 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW009D 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW009E 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW009F 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

Reserved stations, station with the end station number, and stations later than
that are excepted.
Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on. This item is
checked, and the result is stored only upon data link start and the change of a
parameter.
SW00B4 Line test 1 result Stores the result of the line test 1.   
to 0: Normal
SW00B7 1: Error

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW00B4 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW00B5 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW00B6 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW00B7 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations.


SW00B8 Line test 2 result Stores the result of a line test.   
0: Normal
Values other than 0:Error code ( Page App. - 23 List of error codes)
SW0140 Compatible CC- Stores a slave station that supports the CC-Link Ver.2 mode.   
to Link Ver. 0: Ver.1-compatible slave station
SW0143 information 1: Ver.2-compatible slave station

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW0140 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW0141 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW0142 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW0143 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

The bits turn on by the number of occupied stations.


Reserved stations, station with the end station number, and stations later than
that are excepted.

APPENDICES
App. - 20 Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SW0144 CC-Link Ver. Stores whether a CC-Link version matches between the parameter settings and   
to installation/ the modules on slave stations.
SW0147 parameter 0: Normal
matching status 1: Mismatch error

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW0144 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW0145 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW0146 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW0147 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

■Example of a mismatch error

Installation Parameter
Ver.2-compatible remote device Ver.1-compatible remote device
station station
Ver.1-compatible remote device Ver.2-compatible remote device
station station

The bits corresponding to the start station number and the number of occupied
stations turn on.
Reserved stations, station with the end station number, and stations later than
that are excepted.
SW0148 Parameter mode Stores the mode set to a system.   
0: Remote net Ver.1 mode, Remote device net Ver.1 mode, Remote I/O net
mode
2: Remote net Ver.2 mode, Remote device net Ver.2 mode
SW0149 Parameter mode Stores the mode set to the own station.   
of own station 0: Remote net Ver.1 mode, Remote device net Ver.1 mode, Remote I/O net
mode
A
2: Remote net Ver.2 mode, Remote device net Ver.2 mode
SW0152 Maximum Stores the maximum station number during data link in real time (1 to 64: station   
communication number in the station number setting).
station number Reserved stations, error invalid stations, and temporary error invalid stations are
excepted.
SW0153 Number of Stores the number of modules performing data link in real time.   
connected Reserved stations, error invalid stations, and temporary error invalid stations are
modules involved excepted.
in communication
SW0160 Remote register Stores whether the use of remote registers is prohibited.   
to use prohibited 0: Available
SW0163 status 1: Use prohibited

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW0160 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW0161 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW0162 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW0163 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on.

APPENDICES
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes App. - 21
No. Name Description Availability (: Available, : Not
available)
Online Offline
Master Local
station station
SW0164 Remote device Stores whether the remote device station initialization procedure registration   
to station has been completed.
SW0167 initialization 0: Not completed
procedure 1: Completed
registration
b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0
completion status
SW0164 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW0165 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW0166 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW0167 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on.
SW0183 Transmission Stores the result of a transmission speed test.   
speed test result 0: Normal
Values other than 0:Error code ( Page App. - 23 List of error codes)
SW0184 Transmission Stores the result of the transmission speed test for each station.   
to speed test result 0: Normal (same transmission speed as the master station) or no response
SW0187 of each station from the module
1: Error (different transmission speed from the master station)

b15 b14 b13 b12 to b3 b2 b1 b0


SW0184 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1

SW0185 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17

SW0186 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33

SW0187 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49
1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers.

Only the bit corresponding to the start station number turns on.

The timing of when data in link special register area (SW) are updated differs depending on the link special register number.
The following table lists the update timing.
Link special register Data update timing Link special register Data update timing
SW0041 Updated regardless of the SB status SW0071 Updated regardless of the SB status
(Updated after each station becomes stable.)
SW0045 SW0072
SW0060 When the SB0060 status is changed SW0074 to SW0077 When the SB0074 status is changed
SW0061 When the SB0061 status is changed SW0078 to SW007B When the SB0075 status is changed
SW0062 Updated regardless of the SB status SW0080 to SW0083 When the SB0080 status is changed
SW0067 SW0088 to SW008B Updated regardless of the SB status
SW0068 SW0090 When the SB0090 status is changed
SW0069 SW0098 to SW009B Updated regardless of the SB status
SW006A SW009C to SW009
SW006D SW00B4 to SW00B7
SW006E SW00B8
SW006F  
SW0070

APPENDICES
App. - 22 Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes
Appendix 3.3 List of error codes
This section lists the error codes, error details and causes, and action for the errors occur in the processings for data
communication between master/local module and slave stations or caused by processing requests from the CPU module on
the own station.
Error Error details and causes Action Detailed
code information
1080H The number of writes to the flash ROM has exceeded Replace the module. 
100000. (Number of writes > 100000 times)
1810H The hardware has failed. • The possible cause is a malfunction due to noise. Check 
the wire and cable distances and ground condition of
each device, and take measures to reduce noise.
• Perform a hardware test. If the error occurs again, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the module.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
20E0H The module cannot communicate with the CPU module. The hardware failure of the CPU module may have been 
occurred. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
24C0H The hardware has failed. • The possible cause is a malfunction due to noise. Check Parameter information
the wire and cable distances and ground condition of • I/O No.
each device, and take measures to reduce noise. • Base No.
• Perform a hardware test. If the error occurs again, the • Slot No.
possible cause is a hardware failure of the module. • CPU No.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
24C1H The bus communication has failed. • The possible cause is a malfunction due to noise. Check Parameter information
the wire and cable distances and ground condition of • I/O No.
each device, and take measures to reduce noise. • Base No.
• Perform a hardware test. If the error occurs again, the • Slot No.
possible cause is a hardware failure of the module. • CPU No.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
24C2H The bus communication has failed. • The possible cause is a malfunction due to noise. Check Parameter information
the wire and cable distances and ground condition of • I/O No.
each device, and take measures to reduce noise.
• Perform a hardware test. If the error occurs again, the
• Base No.
• Slot No.
A
possible cause is a hardware failure of the module. • CPU No.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
24C3H The bus communication has failed. • The possible cause is a malfunction due to noise. Check Parameter information
the wire and cable distances and ground condition of • I/O No.
each device, and take measures to reduce noise. • Base No.
• Perform a hardware test. If the error occurs again, the • Slot No.
possible cause is a hardware failure of the module. • CPU No.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
24C6H The bus communication has failed. • The possible cause is a malfunction due to noise. Check 
the wire and cable distances and ground condition of
each device, and take measures to reduce noise.
• Perform a hardware test. If the error occurs again, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the module.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3C00H A hardware failure has been detected. • The possible cause is a malfunction due to noise. Check 
the wire and cable distances and ground condition of
each device, and take measures to reduce noise.
• Perform a hardware test. If the error occurs again, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the module.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3C02H A bus error has been detected. • The possible cause is a malfunction due to noise. Check 
the wire and cable distances and ground condition of
each device, and take measures to reduce noise.
• Perform a hardware test. If the error occurs again, the
possible cause is a hardware failure of the module.
Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
3C10H A hardware failure has been detected. • Take measures to reduce noise. 
• Reset the CPU module, and run it again. If the same
error code is displayed again, the possible cause is a
hardware failure of the error module. Please consult your
local Mitsubishi representative.

APPENDICES
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes App. - 23
Error Error details and causes Action Detailed
code information
3C14H A bus error has been detected. Reset the CPU module, and run it again. If the same error 
code is displayed again, the possible cause is a hardware
failure of the error module or CPU module. Please consult
your local Mitsubishi representative.
B002H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B101H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B102H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B103H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B104H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B105H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B106H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B109H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B10AH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B10CH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B110H A line error has occurred. Check and correct the wiring. 
B111H A line error has occurred. Check and correct the wiring. 
B112H A line error has occurred. Check and correct the wiring. 
B113H A line error has occurred. Or a momentary power failure Modify the line, or check the power supply module and 
has occurred in the sending station. power supplied to the sending station.
B115H A line error has occurred. Check and correct the wiring. 
B116H A line error has occurred. Check and correct the wiring. 
B120H With the remote device station initialization procedure Complete all the procedures before turning off the remote 
registration function, the remote device station initialization device station initialization procedure registration
procedure registration instruction was turned off before all instruction.
procedures are completed.
B122H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B123H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B124H The remote device station initialization procedure Turn on the remote device station initialization procedure 
registration instruction was turned on in a station other than registration instruction in the master station (station No.0).
the master station.
B125H • The remote device station initialization procedure • Set the remote device station initialization procedure 
registration instruction was turned on without setting the registration before turning on the remote device station
remote device station initialization procedure initialization procedure registration instruction.
registration. • Turn on only the bit corresponding to the start station
• A bit other than the one corresponding to the start station number in SW0014 to SW0017 (Specification of remote
number was turned on in SW0014 to SW0017 device station to be initialized).
(Specification of remote device station to be initialized) to
instruct the remote device station initialization procedure
registration.
B201H A data link error has occurred in the corresponding station Check the communication status of other stations, if a 
during transient transmission. temporary error invalid station is present, or if the
corresponding station is stopped.
B202H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B203H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B204H Too many transient requests were sent to the Wait for a while and send the request again. 
corresponding station.
B205H A transient request was issued to a station other than an Check the target station. 
intelligent device station.
B301H A line test request was issued during link stop. Perform a line test while data link is being performed. 
B302H The specified station number for a line test request, Specify a station number smaller than or equal to the 
temporary error invalid request, or temporary error invalid maximum communication station number.
canceling request is greater than the maximum station
number that can communicate.
B303H Target station number is not set for temporary error invalid Set the station number. (SW0003, SW0004 to SW0007) 
request or temporary error invalid cancellation request.
B304H When a line test was executed, an error has been detected Check if the remote station, intelligent device station, or 
in a remote station, intelligent device station, or standby standby master station have been started, and that the
master station. cables are not disconnected.
B305H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 

APPENDICES
App. - 24 Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes
Error Error details and causes Action Detailed
code information
B306H A station number other than the start station number has Specify the start station for the temporary error invalid 
been specified in the temporary error invalid request or request or temporary error invalid cancellation request.
temporary error invalid canceling request.
B307H When one of the following requests is issued, a data link Issue the request again after the data link returns to 
error has occurred in all stations. normal.
• SB0000 (Data link restart)
• SB0002 (Data link stop)
B308H A slave station number is not within 1 to 64. Set the station number for the slave station within 1 to 64. 
B309H The station number of the connected module is duplicated Check the station number of the module. 
(including the number of occupied stations). However,
excluding duplication of the start station number.
B30AH • The station type differs between the mounted modules • Correct the parameter. 
and parameter settings. • Set the parameters of the master station, local station, or
• The mode setting is invalid in the master station, local standby master station again, and reset the CPU
station, or standby master station. module.
• The mode of the master station differs from that of the
standby master station.
B30BH The module parameter details do not match the installation Correct the installation status or module parameters so that 
status. both are matched.
B30CH The master station switching was instructed to a station Specify the standby master station number. 
other than the standby master station.
B30DH A request, such as the temporary error invalid station Issue the request after the data link is started. 
specification, line test request, or data link stop/restart
request, was issued before data link is started.
B30EH Execution of a function that is started using SB, SW and Execute the corresponding function from the master 
executable only on the master station was attempted on a station.
local station.
B30FH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B310H SB0000 (Data link restart) was turned on specifying the Turn on SB0000 (Data link restart) specifying the station 
station that was performing data link. where data link has been stopped using SB0002 (Data link
stop).
B311H SB0002 (Data link stop) was turned on specifying the Turn on SB0002 (Data link stop) specifying the station  A
station where data link had been stopped. performing data link.
B312H SB000C (Forced master switching) was turned on in a Start the data link of the standby master station then turn 
system where no standby master station exists or the on SB000C (Forced master switching).
standby master station was down.
B313H SB000C (Forced master switching) was turned on in a Start the data link of the standby master station then turn 
system where all stations were faulty. on SB000C (Forced master switching).
B314H SB000C (Forced master switching) was turned on for a Turn on SB000C (Forced master switching) in the master 
station other than the master station. station.
B315H While the master station was being switched to the standby Correct the status of SB000C (Forced master switching). 
master station, SB000C (Forced master switching) was
turned on again.
B316H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B317H • The RLPASET instruction was executed to a module Clear parameters for the target module using the 
where parameters had been set using the engineering engineering tool then set the parameters using the
tool. RLPASET instruction.
• The parameter setting was changed without powering off
and on the programmable controller system or resetting
the CPU module.
B31AH The master station duplication error canceling instruction Do not execute the master station duplication error 
was executed while data link had already been started. cancellation instruction during data link.
B31BH The transmission speed test was performed during data Turn on SB000B (Transmission speed test request) after 
link. turning on SB0002 (Data link stop).
B31CH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B31DH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B31EH Logging was started while logs were being deleted. Delete the logs then start logging. 
B31FH Logs were deleted during logging. Stop the logging then delete the logs. 
B320H Logging was executed or logs were deleted in the remote I/ Set the remote net mode then start the logging or delete 
O net mode. the logs.
B321H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 

APPENDICES
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes App. - 25
Error Error details and causes Action Detailed
code information
B322H The logs were deleted during data link with "RAM + Flash Terminate the data link then delete the logs. 
ROM" selected.
B323H Although the logs had been set to be deleted with "RAM + Delete the logs again with "RAM + Flash ROM" selected. 
Flash ROM" selected, logging was started before deletion
of logs was complete.
B324H Storing logs to the flash ROM was attempted when the Delete the logs with "RAM + Flash ROM" selected then 
flash ROM was not ready for storage. start logging, or start logging with "RAM" selected.
B325H The cumulative number of times that logs are stored on the Start logging with "RAM" selected. 
flash ROM has exceeded 100000 times. To execute logging with "RAM + Flash ROM" selected,
replace the module.
B326H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B384H In the station information parameter, a number other than Set the number within the range of 1H to 40H. 
1H to 40H is set for a station number (including the number
of occupied stations).
B385H The total number of occupied stations set in the station Set the value to 64 or less. 
information parameter exceeded 64.
B386H In the station information parameter, all the number of Set the value within the range of 1 to 4. 
occupied stations is set to 0.
B388H The station type in the station information parameter is out Set a value within 0 to 2 in the remote net Ver.1 mode. 
of the range in the remote net Ver.1 mode.
B38AH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B38BH More than 42 remote device stations are set in the station Set the number of remote device stations to 42 or less. 
information parameter. Set the stations to remote device net mode.
B38CH More than 26 intelligent device stations (including local Set the number of intelligent device stations to 26 or less. 
stations) are set in the station information parameter.
B38DH In the invalid station specification parameter, a station Set the start station number of the module. Do not set a 
number other than the start station number of the module station number not set in the parameter.
or a station number not set in the parameter is set.
[Example of when a station number other than the start
station number is set]
For a module that occupies 4 stations (station No.5 to
No.8), a bit corresponding to a station number other than
the station No.5 is on.
B38FH The total size of the automatic update buffer set in the Set the total size of the automatic update buffer within 4K 
station information parameter exceeded 4K words. words.
B390H A value other than 1 to 64 is set in the standby master Set the value within the range of 1 to 64. 
station specification parameter.
B391H A value other than 1 to 7 is set in the number of retries Set the value within the range of 1 to 7. 
parameter.
B392H A value other than 0 or 1 is set in the parameter of data link Set 0 or 1. 
setting when CPU is down.
B393H A value other than 0 or 1 is set in the scan mode setting Set 0 or 1. 
parameter.
B394H A value other than 1 to 10 is set in the number of automatic Set the value within the range of 1 to 10. 
return stations parameter.
B395H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B396H The station number is already in use in the station Set a unique number. 
information parameter.
B397H The station information parameter setting does not meet Set parameters so that the conditions described in the left 
the following condition: are satisfied.
(16  A) + (54  B) + (88  C)  2304
A: The number of remote I/O stations
B: The number of remote device stations
C: The number of intelligent device stations (including
local stations)
B398H A value other than 1 to 4 is set as the number of occupied Set the value within the range of 1 to 4. 
stations in the station information parameter.
B399H A value other than 1 to 64 is set in the number of Set the value within the range of 1 to 64. 
connected modules parameter.

APPENDICES
App. - 26 Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes
Error Error details and causes Action Detailed
code information
B39AH The station number set using the station number setting of Change the parameter for the master station, or change 
the standby master station differs from the one set in the station number setting of the local station or standby
"Standby master station number" of the module parameter master station. Then reset the CPU module on the local
for the master station. Or the station set in "Standby master station or standby master station.
station number" of the module parameter for the master
station is a local station.
B39BH All stations are set as a reserved station. Correct the reserved station specification. 
B39CH • A station type other than an intelligent device station is • Specify the standby master station as an intelligent 
set as the station type for the station specified in device station.
"Standby master station number" of the module • Set the same mode for the master station and the
parameter for the master station. standby master station.
• The mode setting of the master station differs from that
of the standby master station.
B39DH Zero points are set for a station other than a reserved Set zero points for a reserved station. 
station.
B39EH • 8 points or 16 points are set for a station other than a • 8 points and 16 points are set for the same remote I/O 
remote I/O station. station.
• 8 points and 16 points are set for the same remote I/O • Set either 8 points or 16 points for the remote I/O station.
station.
B3A0H The mode setting is invalid in the master station, local Correct the mode setting of the master station, local 
station, or standby master station. station, or standby master station again, and reset the CPU
• The mode of the master station differs from that of the module.
standby master station.
• The local station is in the remote net Ver.2 mode, and the
master station is in the remote net Ver.1 mode.
B3A2H In the remote I/O net mode, a station other than a remote I/ Set all stations as a remote I/O station. 
O station is set in the station type parameter using the
dedicated instruction.
B3A3H In the remote net Ver.2 mode, the total number of remote Change the number of remote station points set in the 
points in station information exceeded 8192, the maximum station information settings.
number of points.
B3A4H While the standby master station was operating as a Undo the module parameters of the master station. 
master station by the master station duplex function, the A
network parameter setting of the faulty master station was
changed.
B3A6H In the remote device net mode, a station type other than a Set all stations as a remote device station. 
remote I/O station or remote device station is set in the
station type parameter using the dedicated instruction.
B3F1H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B3F2H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B3F3H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B401H The parameter setting was changed during transient Change the parameters after all transient requests are 
request. completed or before the request is issued.
B404H A response is not received from the request destination Increase the monitoring time value. 
station within the monitoring time. If the error occurs again, check the modules and cables at
the destination.
B405H A transient request was issued to a remote I/O station or a Set a local station or an intelligent device station as the 
remote device station. Or too many transient requests were target station or wait for a while and send the request
sent to the corresponding station. again. (Transient overload state)
B407H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B409H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B411H The number of read/write points in the control data of the Set a number of read points or write points within range. 
dedicated instruction is out of the range.
B412H The station number in the control data of the dedicated Set the station number within range. 
instruction is out of the range.
B413H Multiple dedicated instructions were executed to the same Review the program. 
station.
B414H The value set in the interlock signal storage device of the Set the interlock signal storage device value within range. 
RIRCV instruction or RISEND instruction is out of range.
B415H The dedicated instruction which is executable only on the Check if the own station type is a master station. 
master station was attempted to be executed on a station
other than the master station.

APPENDICES
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes App. - 27
Error Error details and causes Action Detailed
code information
B416H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B417H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B418H With the message transmission function, an abnormal data Set the receivable data size to a value larger than the 
was received. receive data size.
B419H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B41AH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B601H An unsupported request was received. Check and correct the request data or the target station 
number.
B602H Too many transient requests were sent to the Wait for a while and send the request again. 
corresponding station.
B603H Too many transient requests were sent to the Wait for a while and send the request again. 
corresponding station.
B604H Transient transmission was performed during a line test. Wait for a while and send the request again. 
B605H The transient storage buffer data was failed to be obtained. Wait for a while and send the request again. 
B606H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B607H The CPU module on the target station is in error. Check the CPU module of the target station. 
B608H Transient transmission was performed to the AJ61BT11 or Set the target station to intelligent mode. 
A1SJ61BT11 in the I/O mode.
B60CH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B700H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B701H Transient transmission failed. • Reduce the load placed on the transient transmission 
and perform the transmission again.
• If the error occurs again even after taking the above,
please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
B702H Transient transmission failed. • Reduce the load placed on the transient transmission 
and perform the transmission again.
• If the error occurs again even after taking the above,
please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
B703H Transient transmission failed. • Reduce the load placed on the transient transmission 
and perform the transmission again.
• If the error occurs again even after taking the above,
please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
B704H Transient transmission failed. • Reduce the load placed on the transient transmission 
and perform the transmission again.
• If the error occurs again even after taking the above,
please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
B705H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B706H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B771H Too many transient requests were sent to the Wait for a while and send the request again. 
corresponding station.
B772H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B773H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B774H The target station was not an intelligent device station. Check if the target station is an intelligent device station. 
B775H Unsupported transient data was received. Check the application on the source that issued the 
request.
B776H Unsupported transient data was received. Check the application on the source that issued the 
request.
B777H Unsupported transient data was received. Check the application on the source that issued the 
request.
B778H A response is not received from the request destination. Check the modules and cables at the request destination. 
B779H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B780H Transient transmission was performed although the target Set the target station to intelligent mode. 
station was set to I/O mode.
B781H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B782H When connection to another station is set, the sending Check the station number of the destination or change the 
destination station and the sending source station are the setting to connection to the own station.
same.

APPENDICES
App. - 28 Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes
Error Error details and causes Action Detailed
code information
B783H When data larger than 1K was being sent in transient Wait for a while and send the request again. 
transmission, an error has occurred in the transient storage
buffer.
B801H A non-existing access code or attribute is set. Set the correct access code or attribute. 
B802H A non-existing access code was used. Use the correct access code. 
B803H The number of data points is out of the range. Set the number of data points within 1 to 960 bytes. 
B804H • The attribute definition is invalid. • Correct the attributes definition. 
• A transient transmission was performed although the • Correct the target station number setting.
target station does not support transient transmission. • Correct the function version of the target local station
and software version.
B805H The number of data points is out of the range. Set a value within 1 to 100 for writing and within 1 to 160 
for reading.
B807H • The start device number is out of the range. • Set the start device number within the range. 
• The address was not a multiple of 16 when the bit device • Set the address in multiples of 16 when the bit device is
was accessed. accessed.
B80AH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B80DH The set combination (address and number of points) Set the number of points to be processed within the device 
exceeded the processable range. range.
B80FH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B810H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B811H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B812H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B814H The file register capacity is not set. Set the file register capacity. 
B815H Transient transmission was performed although the target Set the target station to intelligent mode. 
station was set to I/O mode.
B817H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B821H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B822H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B823H The mode setting of the remote control is not correct. Correct the mode specification.  A
B824H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B826H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B830H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B903H A transient request was issued to a station that had not Secure a communication buffer area using the parameter. 
secured a communication buffer.
B981H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B982H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B983H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B984H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B985H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B986H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B987H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B988H An error has been detected in the CPU module. Check the error of the CPU module and take action using 
the module diagnostics.
A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B989H An error has been detected in the CPU module. Check the error of the CPU module and take action using 
the module diagnostics.
A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
B9FFH An error has been detected in the CPU module. Check the error of the CPU module and take action using 
the module diagnostics.
A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA01H A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA02H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA05H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA06H A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA07H A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA08H A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 

APPENDICES
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes App. - 29
Error Error details and causes Action Detailed
code information
BA09H A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA0AH A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA0BH A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA0CH A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA0DH A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA0EH A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA0FH A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA10H A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA11H A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA12H A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA13H A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA14H A hardware (communication circuit) failure has been • Check that the terminating resistor provided with the 
detected. master/local module is connected between the DA and
DB terminals, and execute the hardware test again.
• If the error occurs again even after taking the above,
please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
BA15H A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA16H A hardware (communication circuit) failure has been • Check that the terminating resistor provided with the 
detected. master/local module is connected between the DA and
DB terminals, and execute the hardware test again.
• If the error occurs again even after taking the above,
please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
BA17H A hardware (communication circuit) failure has been • Check that the terminating resistor provided with the 
detected. master/local module is connected between the DA and
DB terminals, and execute the hardware test again.
• If the error occurs again even after taking the above,
please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
BA19H The target station of the line test 2 cannot be Check the cables and the target station. 
communicated.
BA1BH A communication failure has occurred in all stations during Check the cables. 
execution of the line test 1.
BA1FH A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA20H A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BA21H A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BB01H Execution of some of the following was attempted at the Execute after other processing is completed. 
same time on the same station (Including the same
request).
• Remote device station initialization procedure
registration function
• RISEND or RIRCV instruction
• Access from a peripheral to a remote device station
BBC1H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BBC2H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BBC3H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BBC5H • Multiple master stations exist on the same line. • Reduce the number of master stations on the same line 
• Noise has been detected on the line at power-on. to one.
• When the data link starts by turning on SB0007 (Master
station duplication error cancel request), check the line
status.
BBC7H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BBC8H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BBCAH Multiple standby master stations exist on the same line. • Reduce the number of standby master stations on the 
same line to one.
• Check the line status.
BBCBH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BBD1H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BBD3H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BC01H A data link error has occurred on all stations during a Issue the request after the data link is started. 
message transmission.

APPENDICES
App. - 30 Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes
Error Error details and causes Action Detailed
code information
BC02H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BC03H The target station specified for the message transmission Check the parameters or operation on the target station. 
function is in any of the following status.
• No network parameter is set.
• The specified station number is not the start station
number.
• The station is set as a reserved station.
• A data link error has occurred (including error on all
stations).
BC04H The message transmission was performed to a station Check the target station. 
other than a remote device station or intelligent device
station.
BC05H The target station number specified for message Check the specified station number. 
transmission function is not within 1 to 64.
BC06H The message transmission function was attempted to be Execute the message transmission function on the master 
executed on a station other than the master station. station.
BC07H The transmission data size was out of the range when Set the transmission data size within the range. 
message transmission function was executed.
BC33H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BC34H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BC35H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BC36H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BC37H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BC38H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BC39H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BC50H With the message transmission function, an abnormal data Check the program to see if any prohibited remote output 
was received. (RY) has not been accessed. If the error occurs again even
after checking the above, the possible cause is a failure of
a master/local module or remote device station. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
BC51H • During execution of message transmission function, a • Check the operation of the target remote device station.  A
data link error has occurred on the corresponding • Stop the data link then change the parameters.
station. • Check the program to see if any prohibited remote
• During execution of message transmission, some output (RY) has not been accessed. If the error occurs
parameters were changed. again even after checking the above, the possible cause
• With the message transmission function, an abnormal is a failure of a master/local module or remote device
data was received. station. Please consult your local Mitsubishi
representative.
BC52H • With the message transmission function, a • Set a larger value in SW0009 (Monitoring time setting) If 
communication timeout has occurred. the error occurs again, check the modules and cables at
• SB0002 (Data link stop) was turned on during message the destination.
transmission. • Stop data link after completion of message transmission.
• With the message transmission function, a stop error in • To execute message transmission while there is a stop
the CPU module was detected. error in the CPU module, set the data link setting when
CPU is down to "Continue Data Link".
BC53H • With the message transmission function, a • Set a larger value in SW0009 (Monitoring time setting) If 
communication timeout has occurred. the error occurs again, check the modules and cables at
• SB0002 (Data link stop) was turned on during message the destination.
transmission. • Stop data link after completion of message transmission.
• With the message transmission function, a stop error in • To execute message transmission while there is a stop
the CPU module was detected. error in the CPU module, set the data link setting when
CPU is down to "Continue Data Link".
BC54H With the message transmission function, an abnormal data Execute the message transmission function again. If the 
was received. error occurs again, the possible cause is a failure of a
master/local module or remote device station. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
BC55H With the message transmission function, an abnormal data Execute the message transmission function again. If the 
was received. error occurs again, the possible cause is a failure of a
master/local module or remote device station. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
BC57H Multiple peripherals tried to access the same remote Execute after other processing is completed. 
device station at the same time.

APPENDICES
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes App. - 31
Error Error details and causes Action Detailed
code information
BC58H With the message transmission function, an abnormal data Execute the message transmission function again. If the 
was received. error occurs again, the possible cause is a failure of a
master/local module or remote device station. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
BC59H With the message transmission function, an abnormal data Execute the message transmission function again. If the 
was received. error occurs again, the possible cause is a failure of a
master/local module or remote device station. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
BC5AH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BC5BH With the message transmission function, an abnormal Check the operation of the target remote device station. 
response was received.
BC5CH With the message transmission function, an abnormal data Execute the message transmission function again. If the 
was received. error occurs again, the possible cause is a failure of a
master/local module or remote device station. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
BC5DH With the message transmission function, an abnormal data Execute the message transmission function again. If the 
was received. error occurs again, the possible cause is a failure of a
master/local module or remote device station. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
BC5EH With the message transmission function, an abnormal data Execute the message transmission function again. If the 
was received. error occurs again, the possible cause is a failure of a
master/local module or remote device station. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
BC5FH With the message transmission function, an abnormal data Execute the message transmission function again. If the 
was received. error occurs again, the possible cause is a failure of a
master/local module or remote device station. Please
consult your local Mitsubishi representative.
BC60H • The message transmission function was executed Reduce the number for simultaneous execution to four or 
simultaneously for five or more remote device stations. less.
• The message transmission function was executed
simultaneously for five or more intelligent device
stations.
BC70H The peripherals sent requests to the remote device station Reduce the number for simultaneous execution to four or 
exceeding the number of concurrent execution. less.
BC71H The remote device station access function was attempted Execute the function from the master station. 
to be performed from a station other than the master
station.
BC72H The remote device station to be accessed from the Check the parameters or operation on the target station. 
peripherals is in any of the following.
• The station is not set in the network parameter.
• The specified station number is not the start station
number.
• The station is set as a reserved station.
• A data link error has occurred (including error on all
stations).
BC73H The remote device station to be accessed from the Check the station number and station type of the specified 
peripherals is a remote I/O station. target station.
BC74H The specified device (RX, RY, RWw, or RWr) number is out Check the parameters and the device range of the target 
of the valid device range for the connected target station. station.
BC75H A data link error has occurred in all stations during access Issue the request after the data link is started. 
from the peripherals to the remote device station.
BC76H Time check over has occurred during access from the Increase the time check time in the application of the 
peripherals to the remote device station. request source, or check the operation of the target slave
station.
BC81H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BC90H The message transmission result read request was Correct the target station number at the request source and 
received from the station with an unacceptable target retry the operation.
station number.
BC91H Timeout has occurred in receiving response data of Set a larger value in SW0009 (Monitoring time setting) for 
message transmission. execution. If the error occurs again, check the modules and
cables at the destination.
BD83H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BD84H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 

APPENDICES
App. - 32 Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes
Error Error details and causes Action Detailed
code information
BD85H An error was detected in the CPU module. Check the error of the CPU module and take action using 
the module diagnostics.
A hardware failure has been detected. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BD86H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BD87H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF11H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF12H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF13H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF14H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF15H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF16H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF17H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF18H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF19H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF1AH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF1BH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF1CH System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF20H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF30H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF31H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF32H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF33H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF34H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF35H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF36H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF37H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF38H An error has been detected in reading the execution result • Check the application on the source that issued the  A
in access from the peripherals to the remote device station. request.
• Check if another peripheral is accessing the remote
device station.
BF39H An error has been detected in the request procedure in • Check the application on the source that issued the 
access from the peripherals to the remote device station. request.
• Check if multiple peripherals are accessing the remote
device station.
• Check if a value is written in the system area in the buffer
memory.
BF40H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF41H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF42H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF43H The station type of the target station for message Correct the target station at the request source and retry 
transmission is neither a remote device station nor the operation.
intelligent device station.
BF44H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BF50H System error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative. 
BFFAH The message transmission function was executed Reduce the number for simultaneous execution to four or 
simultaneously for five or more intelligent device stations. less.
BFFBH Too many transient requests were sent from the Wait for a while and send the request again. 
engineering tool or GOT.

APPENDICES
Appendix 3 List of Link Special Relay Areas/Link Special Register Areas/Error Codes App. - 33
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
Dedicated instructions facilitate programming for using intelligent function modules.
A master/local module can perform the following operations by using dedicated instructions.
• Transient transmission to a master station, local station, and intelligent device station
• Module parameter settings for a master station

List of dedicated instructions


For details on dedicated instructions, refer to the following.
 MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Instructions, Standard Functions/Function Blocks)
Target station Instruction Description
Master station RIRD Reads data of the specified number of points from the buffer memory of the target station or the device in the
Local station CPU module on the target station.
Intelligent device station
RIWT Writes data of the specified number of points to the buffer memory of the target station or the device in the
CPU module on the target station.
Intelligent device station RIRCV Automatically performs a handshake with the specified intelligent device station and reads data from its
buffer memory.
The instruction can be used for communications with a module supporting a handshake signal such as
AJ65BT-R2N.
RISEND Automatically performs a handshake with the specified intelligent device station and writes data to its buffer
memory.
The instruction can be used for communications with a module supporting a handshake signal such as
AJ65BT-R2N.
RIFR Reads data from the automatic update buffer or random access buffer of the intelligent device station.
The instruction can be used for communications with a module having the automatic update buffer such as
AJ65BT-R2N.
RITO Writes data to the automatic update buffer of the intelligent device station or random access buffer.
The instruction can be used for communications with a module having the automatic update buffer such as
AJ65BT-R2N.
Remote device station RDMSG Reads/writes parameters from/to the remote device station and reads the status of the remote device
station.
The instruction can be used for communications with a remote device station supporting the message
transmission function such as NZ2AW1C2AL.
Master station RLPASET Sets network parameters in the master station and starts up the data link.

APPENDICES
App. - 34 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
Appendix 4.1 RIRD (Reading data from the target station)

G(P).RIRD

RnSFCPU RnSFCPU
RnCPU RnENCPU RnPCPU (Standard) (Safety)

This instruction reads data of the specified number of points from the buffer memory of the target station or the device of its
CPU module.
Ladder ST
ENO:=G_RIRD(EN,U,s,d1,d2);
ENO:=GP_RIRD(EN,U,s,d1,d2);
(U) (s) (d1) (d2)

FBD/LD

EN ENO

U d1

s d2

■Execution condition
Instruction Execution condition
G.RIRD

GP.RIRD

Setting data
A
■Description, range, data type
Operand Description Range Data type Data type (label)
(U) Start I/O number (first three digits in four-digit 00H to FEH 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
hexadecimal representation) of a module
(s) Start device where control data is stored Refer to the control data. Device name ANY16*1
(d1) Start device for storing the read data  Device name ANY16*1
(d2) Device to be turned on one scan upon completion  Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
of the instruction (Number of elements:
(d2)+1 also turns on when the instruction 2)
completes with an error.
EN Execution condition  Bit BOOL
ENO Execution result  Bit BOOL

*1 When specifying data with a label, define the array so that an area required for operation can be secured, and specify the array label
element.

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 35
■Applicable devices
Operand Bit Word Double word Indirect Constant Others
X, Y, M, L, J\ T, ST, C, D, W, U\G, Z LT, LST, LZ specification K, H E $ (U)
SM, F, B, SB, SD, SW, FD, R, J\, LC
FX, FY ZR, RD U3E\(H)G
(U)*1            
*3
(s)            
(d1)   *3         
(d2) *2  *4         

*1 Index modification is not available.


*2 FX and FY cannot be used.
*3 FD cannot be used.
*4 T, ST, C, and FD cannot be used.

■Control data
Operand: (s)
Device Item Description Setting range Set by
+0 Completion status The instruction completion status is stored.  System
• 0: Completed successfully
• Other than 0: Completed with an error (error code)
+1 Station number Specify the station number of the target station. 0 to 64 User
+2 Access/attribute code Specify the type of the buffer memory or device from which to read data. Refer to User
••• ••• "Access/attribute
b15 b8 b7 b0
code."
Access code Attribute code

+3 Buffer memory address Specify the start address of the buffer memory or the start device from which to read Refer to the User
or device number data. manual of the
target station.*1
+4 Number of read points Specify the number of read points in units of words. 1 to 480*2 User
1 to 32*3

*1 When specifying the random access buffer, specify the address with the start of the random access buffer defined as 0.
*2 Specify a value within the capacity of the target station buffer memory area or device.
*3 If data is to be read from a device of the target station CPU module and the CPU module is other than RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), QCPU
(A mode), LCPU, QnACPU, or AnUCPU, the setting range is 1 to 32 words.

APPENDICES
App. - 36 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
■Access/attribute code
• When data is read from the buffer memory in the CC-Link module
Contents of buffer memory Access code Attribute code
Buffer in intelligent device station 00H 04H
Buffer in master, local, or standby master station Random access buffer 20H 04H
Remote input 21H 04H
Remote output 22H 04H
Remote register 24H 04H
Link special relay 63H 04H
Link special register 64H 04H

• When data is read from a CPU module device


Device category*1 Name Device type Unit Access code Attribute code
Bit Word
Input relay X   Hexadecimal 01H 05H
Output relay Y   Hexadecimal 02H 05H
Internal relay M   Decimal 03H 05H
Latch relay L   Decimal 83H 05H
Link relay B   Hexadecimal 23H 05H
Timer (contact) T   Decimal 09H 05H
Timer (coil) T   Decimal 0AH 05H
Timer (current value) T   Decimal 0CH 05H
Retentive timer (contact) ST   Decimal 89H 05H
Retentive timer (coil) ST   Decimal 8AH 05H
Retentive timer (current value) ST   Decimal 8CH 05H
Counter (contact) C   Decimal 11H 05H
Counter (coil) C   Decimal 12H 05H
Counter (current value)
*2
C   Decimal 14H 05H
A
Data register D   Decimal 04H 05H
Link register*2 W   Hexadecimal 24H 05H
File register R   Decimal 84H 05H
Link special relay SB   Hexadecimal 63H 05H
Link special register SW   Hexadecimal 64H 05H
Special relay SM   Decimal 43H 05H
Special register SD   Decimal 44H 05H

*1 Only the above devices can be specified. To read data from a bit device, specify it with 0 or a multiple of 16.
*2 None of D65536 and the subsequent extended data register areas and of W10000 and the subsequent extended link register areas are
accepted.

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 37
Processing details
• This instruction reads data of the specified number of points from the buffer memory of the target station or the device of its
CPU module.
• From the master station, the instruction can be executed for the local station, standby master station, or intelligent device
station. From the local station or standby master station, the instruction can be executed for the master station, local
station, or standby master station.
• The following figure shows how the G(P).RIRD instruction operates during execution.
[Own station] [Target station]

CPU module CC-Link master station CC-Link local station CPU module
G(P).RIRD
(d1) (s)+2
(s)+3

Receive buffer Buffer memory

 Data is read from the buffer memory area specified by (s)+2 and (s)+3 that is included in the station specified by (s)+1 or from the device of the CPU module.
 The read data is stored in the receive buffer of the master station.
 The read data is stored in the device specified by (d1) and later, and the device specified by (d2) is turned on.

• Normal/error completion of the G(P).RIRD instruction can be checked with the completion device specified by the setting
data (d2) and the completion status indication device (d2)+1.
• Completion device (d2)
This device turns on during END processing of the scan that arises upon completion of the G(P).RIRD instruction, and turns off during
the next END processing.
• Completion status indication device (d2)+1
This device turns on or off depending on the status resulting from completion of the G(P).RIRD instruction.
When completed successfully: The device remains off.
• When completed with an error: The device turns on during END processing of the scan that arises upon completion of the G(P).RIRD
instruction, and turns off during the next END processing.

Precautions
• The monitoring time and the number of retries can be set with the following link special register (SW) areas.
• Monitoring time setting (SW0009)
• Setting of the number of retries for dedicated instruction (SW000B)
• The G(P).RIRD instruction can be concurrently executed for two or more local stations, standby master stations, or
intelligent device stations. Two or more dedicated instructions, including those other than this instruction, cannot be
concurrently executed for a single station. If the next dedicated instruction is issued before completion of the preceding one
that has started, the next one will be ignored. Create the program so that the next dedicated instruction will start after the
completion device turns on, because processing of a dedicated instruction takes several scans until its completion.

Operation error
Error code Description
((s)+0)
4000H to 4FFFH  MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)
B000H to BFFFH  MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application)

APPENDICES
App. - 38 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
Appendix 4.2 RIWT (Writing data to the target station)

G(P).RIWT

RnSFCPU RnSFCPU
RnCPU RnENCPU RnPCPU (Standard) (Safety)

This instruction writes data of the specified number of points to the buffer memory of the target station or the device of its CPU
module.
Ladder ST
ENO:=G_RIWT(EN,U,s1,s2,d);
ENO:=GP_RIWT(EN,U,s1,s2,d);
(U) (s1) (s2) (d)

FBD/LD

EN ENO

U d

s1

s2

■Execution condition
Instruction Execution condition
G.RIWT

GP.RIWT

A
Setting data
■Description, range, data type
Operand Description Range Data type Data type (label)
(U) Start I/O number (first three digits in four-digit 00H to FEH 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
hexadecimal representation) of a module
(s1) Start device where control data is stored Refer to the control data. Device name ANY16*1
(s2) Start device for storing the data to be written  Device name ANY16*1
(d) Device to be turned on one scan upon  Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
completion of the instruction (Number of elements: 2)
(d)+1 also turns on when the instruction
completes with an error.
EN Execution condition  Bit BOOL
ENO Execution result  Bit BOOL

*1 When specifying data with a label, define the array so that an area required for operation can be secured, and specify the array label
element.

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 39
■Applicable devices
Operand Bit Word Double word Indirect Constant Others
X, Y, M, L, J\ T, ST, C, D, W, U\G, Z LT, LST, LZ specification K, H E $ (U)
SM, F, B, SB, SD, SW, FD, R, J\, LC
FX, FY ZR, RD U3E\(H)G
(U)*1            
*3
(s1)            
(s2)   *3         
(d) *2  *4         

*1 Index modification is not available.


*2 FX and FY cannot be used.
*3 FD cannot be used.
*4 T, ST, C, and FD cannot be used.

■Control data
Operand: (s1)
Device Item Description Setting range Set by
+0 Completion status The instruction completion status is stored.  System
• 0: Completed successfully
• Other than 0: Completed with an error (error code)
+1 Station number Specify the station number of the target station. 0 to 64 User
+2 Access/attribute code Specify the type of the buffer memory or device to which to write data. Refer to User
••• ••• "Access/attribute
b15 b8 b7 b0
code."
Access code Attribute code

+3 Buffer memory address Specify the start address of the buffer memory or the start device to which to write Refer to the User
or device number data. manual of the
target station.*1
+4 Number of write points Specify the number of write points in units of words. 1 to 480*2 User
1 to 32*3

*1 When specifying the random access buffer, specify the address with the start of the random access buffer defined as 0.
*2 Specify a value within the capacity of the target station buffer memory area or device.
*3 If data is to be written to a device of the target station CPU module and the CPU module is other than RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), QCPU
(A mode), LCPU, QnACPU, or AnUCPU, the setting range is 1 to 32 words.

APPENDICES
App. - 40 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
■Access/attribute code
• When data is written to the buffer memory in the CC-Link module
Contents of buffer memory Access code Attribute code
Buffer in intelligent device station 00H 04H
Buffer in master or local station Random access buffer 20H 04H
Remote input 21H 04H
Remote output 22H 04H
Remote register 24H 04H
Link special relay 63H 04H
Link special register 64H 04H

• When data is written to the device of the CPU module


Device category*1 Name Device type Unit Access code Attribute code
Bit Word
Input relay X   Hexadecimal 01H 05H
Output relay Y   Hexadecimal 02H 05H
Internal relay M   Decimal 03H 05H
Latch relay L   Decimal 83H 05H
Link relay B   Hexadecimal 23H 05H
Timer (contact) T   Decimal 09H 05H
Timer (coil) T   Decimal 0AH 05H
Timer (current value) T   Decimal 0CH 05H
Retentive timer (contact) ST   Decimal 89H 05H
Retentive timer (coil) ST   Decimal 8AH 05H
Retentive timer (current value) ST   Decimal 8CH 05H
Counter (contact) C   Decimal 11H 05H
Counter (coil) C   Decimal 12H 05H
Counter (current value)
*2
C   Decimal 14H 05H
A
Data register D   Decimal 04H 05H
Link register*2 W   Hexadecimal 24H 05H
File register R   Decimal 84H 05H
Link special relay SB   Hexadecimal 63H 05H
Link special register SW   Hexadecimal 64H 05H
Special relay SM   Decimal 43H 05H
Special register SD   Decimal 44H 05H

*1 Only the above devices can be specified. To write data to a bit device, specify it with 0 or a multiple of 16.
*2 None of D65536 and the subsequent extended data register areas and of W10000 and the subsequent extended link register areas are
accepted.

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 41
Processing details
• This instruction writes data of the specified number of points to the buffer memory of the target station or the device of its
CPU module.
• From the master station, the instruction can be executed for the local station, standby master station, or intelligent device
station. From the local station or standby master station, the instruction can be executed for the master station, local
station, or standby master station.
• The following figure shows how the G(P).RIWT instruction operates during execution.
[Own station] [Target station]

CPU module CC-Link master station CC-Link local station CPU module

(s2) (s1)+2
G(P).RIWT (s1)+3
Send buffer

Buffer memory

(d)

 The data specified by (s2) is stored in the send buffer of the master station.
 Data is stored in the buffer memory area specified by (s1)+2 and (s1)+3 that is included in the station specified by (s1)+1 or in the device of the CPU module.
 The response indicating the write completion returns from the target station to the master station.
 The device specified by (d) is turned on.

• Normal/error completion of the G(P).RIWT instruction can be checked with the completion device specified by the setting
data (d) and the completion status indication device (d)+1.
• Completion device (d)
This device turns on during END processing of the scan that arises upon completion of the G(P).RIWT instruction, and turns off during
the next END processing.
• Completion status indication device (d)+1
This device turns on or off depending on the status resulting from completion of the G(P).RIWT instruction.
When completed successfully: The device remains off.
When completed with an error: The device turns on during END processing of the scan that arises upon completion of the G(P).RIWT instruction, and turns
off during the next END processing.

Precautions
• The monitoring time and the number of retries can be set with the following link special register (SW) areas.
• Monitoring time setting (SW0009)
• Setting of the number of retries for dedicated instruction (SW000B)
• The G(P).RIWT can be concurrently executed for two or more local or intelligent device stations. Two or more dedicated
instructions, including those other than this instruction, cannot be concurrently executed for a single station. If the next
dedicated instruction is issued before completion of the preceding one that has started, the next one will be ignored. Create
the program so that the next dedicated instruction will start after the completion device turns on, because processing of a
dedicated instruction takes several scans until its completion.

Operation error
Error code Description
((s1)+0)
4000H to 4FFFH  MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)
B000H to BFFFH  MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application)

APPENDICES
App. - 42 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
Appendix 4.3 RIRCV (Reading data from the buffer
memory of the specified intelligent device
station)

G(P).RIRCV

RnSFCPU RnSFCPU
RnCPU RnENCPU RnPCPU (Standard) (Safety)

This instruction automatically performs a handshake with the specified intelligent device station and reads data from its buffer
memory. The instruction can be used for communications with a module supporting a handshake signal such as AJ65BT-
R2N.
Ladder ST
ENO:=G_RIRCV(EN,U,s1,s2,d1,d2);
ENO:=GP_RIRCV(EN,U,s1,s2,d1,d2);
(U) (s1) (d1) (s2) (d2)

FBD/LD

EN ENO

U d1

s1 d2

s2

■Execution condition
Instruction Execution condition
G.RIRCV
A

GP.RIRCV

Setting data
■Description, range, data type
Operand Description Range Data type Data type (label)
(U) Start I/O number (first three digits in four-digit 00H to FEH 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
hexadecimal representation) of a module
(s1) Start device where control data is stored Refer to the control data. Device name ANY16*1
(d1) Start device for storing the read data  Device name ANY16*1
(s2) Start device for storing the interlock signal  Device name ANY16*1
(d2) Device to be turned on one scan upon  Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
completion of the instruction (Number of elements: 2)
(d2)+1 also turns on when the instruction
completes with an error.
EN Execution condition  Bit BOOL
ENO Execution result  Bit BOOL

*1 When specifying data with a label, define the array so that an area required for operation can be secured, and specify the array label
element.

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 43
■Applicable devices
Operand Bit Word Double word Indirect Constant Others
X, Y, M, L, J\ T, ST, C, D, W, U\G, Z LT, LST, LZ specification K, H E $ (U)
SM, F, B, SB, SD, SW, FD, R, J\, LC
FX, FY ZR, RD U3E\(H)G
(U)*1            
*3
(s1)            
(d1)   *3         
(s2)   *3         
*2 *4
(d2)            

*1 Index modification is not available.


*2 FX and FY cannot be used.
*3 FD cannot be used.
*4 T, ST, C, and FD cannot be used.

■Control data
Operand: (s1)
Device Item Description Setting range Set by
+0 Completion status The instruction completion status is stored.  System
• 0: Completed successfully
• Other than 0: Completed with an error (error code)
+1 Station number Specify the station number of the target station. 1 to 64 User
+2 Access/attribute code Specify 0004H. 0004H User
+3 Buffer memory address Specify the start address of the buffer memory area from which to read data. Refer to the User
manual of the
target station.
+4 Number of read points Specify the number of read points in units of words. 1 to 480*1 User

*1 Specify a value within the capacity of the target station buffer memory area.

■Interlock signal
Operand: (s2)
Device Item Description Setting range Set by
+0 RY: Specify the number of the read completion signal (RY) to be used for 00H to 7FH User
b15 ••• b8 b7 ••• b0 interlock.*1
0 RY

+1 RX: Specify the number of the read request signal (RX) to be used for 00H to 7FH User
b15 ••• b8 b7 ••• b0 interlock.*1
0 RX

+2 Dummy Specify 0. 0 User

*1 For the interlock signals, refer to the following.


 Manual of the intelligent device station from which to read data

APPENDICES
App. - 44 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
Processing details
• This instruction automatically performs a handshake with the specified intelligent device station and reads data from its
buffer memory.
• The instruction can be executed, from the master station, for an intelligent device station with a handshake signal (e.g.
AJ65BT-R2N).
• The following figure shows how the G(P).RIRCV instruction operates during execution.
[Own station] [Target station]

CC-Link intelligent device


CPU module CC-Link master station station
G(P).RIRCV
(d1)
RX RX

RY RY
(d2)

Receive buffer Buffer memory

 A request is issued to read data from the buffer memory address specified by (s1)+3 that is included in the station specified by (s1)+1.
 The remote input (RX) specified by (s2)+1 that is in the station specified by (s1)+1 is monitored.
 Turning on the remote input (RX) causes the master station to read the data from the buffer memory of the target station. The read data
is stored in the receive buffer of the master station.
 The master station turns on the remote output (RY) specified by (s2)+0. It turns off the remote output (RY) specified by (s2)+0 by
turning on and off the remote input (RX) specified by (s2)+1.
 The data read from the target station is stored in the device specified by (d1) and later, and the device specified by (d2) is turned on.
• Normal/error completion of the G(P).RIRCV instruction can be checked with the completion device specified by the setting
data (d2) and the completion status indication device (d2)+1.
• Completion device (d2)
This device turns on during END processing of the scan that arises upon completion of the G(P).RIRCV instruction, and turns off during A
the next END processing.
• Completion status indication device (d2)+1
This device turns on or off depending on the status resulting from completion of the G(P).RIRCV instruction.
When completed successfully: The device remains off.
When completed with an error: The device turns on during END processing of the scan that arises upon completion of the G(P).RIRCV
instruction, and turns off during the next END processing.

Precautions
• The monitoring time and the number of retries can be set with the following link special register (SW) areas.
• Monitoring time setting (SW0009)
• Setting of the number of retries for dedicated instruction (SW000B)
• The G(P).RIRCV instruction can be concurrently executed for two or more intelligent device stations. Two or more
dedicated instructions, including those other than this instruction, cannot be concurrently executed for a single station. If the
next dedicated instruction is issued before completion of the preceding one that has started, the next one will be ignored.
Create the program so that the next dedicated instruction will start after the completion device turns on, because
processing of a dedicated instruction takes several scans until its completion.

Operation error
Error code Description
((s1)+0)
4000H to 4FFFH  MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)
B000H to BFFFH  MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application)

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 45
Appendix 4.4 RISEND (Writing data to the buffer memory
of the specified intelligent device station)

G(P).RISEND

RnSFCPU RnSFCPU
RnCPU RnENCPU RnPCPU (Standard) (Safety)

This instruction automatically performs a handshake with the specified intelligent device station and writes data to its buffer
memory. The instruction can be used for communications with a module supporting a handshake signal such as AJ65BT-
R2N.
Ladder ST
ENO:=G_RISEND(EN,U,s1,s2,s3,d);
ENO:=GP_RISEND(EN,U,s1,s2,s3,d);
(U) (s1) (s2) (s3) (d)

FBD/LD

EN ENO

U d

s1

s2

s3

■Execution condition
Instruction Execution condition
G.RISEND

GP.RISEND

Setting data
■Description, range, data type
Operand Description Range Data type Data type (label)
(U) Start I/O number (first three digits in four-digit 00H to FEH 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
hexadecimal representation) of a module
(s1) Start device where control data is stored Refer to the control data. Device name ANY16*1
(s2) Start device for storing the data to be written  Device name ANY16*1
(s3) Start device for storing the interlock signal  Device name ANY16*1
(d) Device to be turned on one scan upon  Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
completion of the instruction (Number of elements: 2)
(d)+1 also turns on when the instruction
completes with an error.
EN Execution condition  Bit BOOL
ENO Execution result  Bit BOOL

*1 When specifying data with a label, define the array so that an area required for operation can be secured, and specify the array label
element.

APPENDICES
App. - 46 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
■Applicable devices
Operand Bit Word Double word Indirect Constant Others
X, Y, M, L, J\ T, ST, C, D, W, U\G, Z LT, LST, LZ specification K, H E $ (U)
SM, F, B, SB, SD, SW, FD, R, J\, LC
FX, FY ZR, RD U3E\(H)G
(U)*1            
*3
(s1)            
(s2)   *3         
(s3)   *3         
*2 *4
(d)            

*1 Index modification is not available.


*2 FX and FY cannot be used.
*3 FD cannot be used.
*4 T, ST, C, and FD cannot be used.

■Control data
Operand: (s1)
Device Item Description Setting range Set by
+0 Completion status The instruction completion status is stored.  System
• 0: Completed successfully
• Other than 0: Completed with an error (error code)
+1 Station number Specify the station number of the target station. 1 to 64 User
+2 Access/attribute code Specify 0004H. 0004H User
+3 Buffer memory address Specify the start address of the buffer memory to which to write data. Refer to the User
manual of the
target station.
+4 Number of write points Specify the number of write points in units of words. 1 to 480*1 User

*1 Specify a value within the capacity of the target station buffer memory area.

■Interlock signal A
Operand: (s3)
Device Item Description Setting range Set by
+0 RY: Specify the number of the write request signal (RY) to be used for 00H to 7FH User
b15 ••• b8 b7 ••• b0 interlock.*1
0 RY

+1 RX: Specify the number of the write completion signal (RX) to be used for 00H to 7FH User
b15 ••• b8 b7 ••• b0 interlock.*1
RWr*1 RX
RWr: Specify the number of the device (RWr) in which to store the error 00H to 0FH, User
code. If the error code storage device does not exist, specify FFH. FFH*2
+2 Specifies how the completion signal behaves. 0, 1 User
b15 ••• b0 • 0: Using Device 1
Completion mode At completion, the RX signal specified by (s2)+1 turns on.
• 1: Using Device 2
For normal completion, the RX signal specified by (s2)+1 turns on. For
error completion, both RX and RX+1 turn on simultaneously.

*1 For the interlock signals, refer to the following.


 Manual of the intelligent device station from which to read data
*2 The error code stored in the error code storage device is the same as the completion status ((s1)+0) of control data.

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 47
Processing details
• This instruction automatically performs a handshake with the specified intelligent device station and writes data to its buffer
memory.
• The instruction can be executed, from the master station, for an intelligent device station with a handshake signal (e.g.
AJ65BT-R2N).
• The following figure shows how the G(P).RISEND instruction operates during execution.
[Own station] [Target station]

CC-Link intelligent device


CPU module CC-Link master station station
G(P).RISEND
(s2)
RX RX

RY RY

(d) Send buffer Buffer memory

 A request is issued to write data to the buffer memory address specified by (s1)+3 that is included in the station specified by (s1)+1.
 The data from the device specified by (s2) and later is stored in the send buffer of the master station.
 The master station writes the data of the send buffer in the buffer memory of the target station.
 The master station turns on the remote output (RY) specified by (s3)+0.
 Upon completion of processing to the remote output (RY), the target station turns on the remote input (RX) specified by (s3)+1. It turns
off the remote input (RX) specified by (s3)+1 by turning on and off the remote output (RY) specified by (s3)+1.
 The device specified by (d) is turned on.
• Normal/error completion of the G(P).RISEND instruction can be checked with the completion device specified by the setting
data (d) and the completion status indication device (d)+1.
• Completion device (d)
This device turns on during END processing of the scan that arises upon completion of the G(P).RISEND instruction, and turns off
during the next END processing.
• Completion status indication device (d)+1
This device turns on or off depending on the status resulting from completion of the G(P).RISEND instruction.
When completed successfully: The device remains off.
When completed with an error: The device turns on during END processing of the scan that arises upon completion of the G(P).RISEND
instruction, and turns off during the next END processing.

Precautions
• The monitoring time and the number of retries can be set with the following link special register (SW) areas.
• Monitoring time setting (SW0009)
• Setting of the number of retries for dedicated instruction (SW000B)
• The G(P).RISEND instruction can be concurrently executed for two or more intelligent device stations. Two or more
dedicated instructions, including those other than this instruction, cannot be concurrently executed for a single station. If the
next dedicated instruction is issued before completion of the preceding one that has started, the next one will be ignored.
Create the program so that the next dedicated instruction will start after the completion device turns on, because
processing of a dedicated instruction takes several scans until its completion.

Operation error
Error code Description
((s1)+0)
4000H to 4FFFH  MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)
B000H to BFFFH  MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application)

APPENDICES
App. - 48 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
Appendix 4.5 RIFR (Reading data from the automatic
update buffer)

G(P).RIFR

RnSFCPU RnSFCPU
RnCPU RnENCPU RnPCPU (Standard) (Safety)

This instruction reads data from the automatic update buffer or random access buffer. The instruction can be used for
communications with a module having the automatic update buffer such as AJ65BT-R2N.
Ladder ST
ENO:=G_RIFR(,ENU,s1,s2,n,d);
ENO:=GP_RIFR(EN,U,s1,s2,n,d);
(U) (s1) (s2) (d) (n)

FBD/LD

EN ENO

U d

s1

s2

■Execution condition
Instruction Execution condition
G.RIFR
A
GP.RIFR

Setting data
■Description, range, data type
Operand Description Range Data type Data type (label)
(U) Start I/O number (first three digits in four-digit 00H to FEH 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
hexadecimal representation) of a module
(s1) If data is read from the automatic update buffer: 1 to 64 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
Station number of the intelligent device station
If data is read from the random access buffer: Specify 00FFH 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
the random access buffer.
(s2) Offset value from the start of the random access buffer 0 to parameter set 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
or automatic update buffer assigned to the target value*1
station
(d) Start device for storing the read data  Device name ANY16*2
(n) Number of read points 1 to 4096 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
EN Execution condition  Bit BOOL
ENO Execution result  Bit BOOL

*1 Value that was set in the CC-Link Configuration window of the engineering tool.
*2 When specifying data with a label, define the array so that an area required for operation can be secured, and specify the array label
element.

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 49
■Applicable devices
Operand Bit Word Double word Indirect Constant Others
X, Y, M, L, J\ T, ST, C, D, W, U\G, Z LT, LST, LZ specification K, H E $ (U)
SM, F, B, SB, SD, SW, FD, R, J\, LC
FX, FY ZR, RD U3E\(H)G
(U)*1            
*2 *3
(s1)            
(s2) *2  *3         
(d)   *3         
(n) *2  *3         

*1 Index modification is not available.


*2 FX and FY cannot be used.
*3 FD cannot be used.

Processing details
• This instruction reads data from the automatic update buffer or random access buffer of the master station.
• The instruction can be executed, from the master station, for an intelligent device station that performs communications
with the automatic update buffer (e.g. AJ65BT-R2N).
• The following figure shows how the G(P).RIFR instruction operates during execution.
[Own station] [Target station]

CC-Link intelligent device


CPU module CC-Link master station station

(s1) G(P).RIFR
Automatic update
buffer Communications Buffer memory
(s2) start when conditions
are satisfied.
Random access Automatic update
buffer buffer memory

(d)

 Data is read from the automatic update buffer or random access buffer specified by (s1) and (s2) that is in the master station.
 The read data is stored in the device specified by (d) and later.

Precautions
• Assignment of the automatic update buffer can be achieved by CC-Link configuration setting of the module parameters.

Operation error
Error code Description
(SD0)
4000H to 4FFFH  MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

APPENDICES
App. - 50 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
Appendix 4.6 RITO (Writing data to the automatic update
buffer)

G(P).RITO

RnSFCPU RnSFCPU
RnCPU RnENCPU RnPCPU (Standard) (Safety)

This instruction writes data to the automatic update buffer or random access buffer. The instruction can be used for
communications with a module having the automatic update buffer such as AJ65BT-R2N.
Ladder ST
ENO:=G_RITO(EN,U,s,n,d1,d2);
ENO:=GP_RITO(EN,U,s,n,d1,d2);
(U) (d1) (d2) (s) (n)

FBD/LD

EN ENO

d1

d2

■Execution condition
Instruction Execution condition
G.RITO A
GP.RITO

Setting data
■Description, range, data type
Operand Description Range Data type Data type (label)
(U) Start I/O number (first three digits in four-digit 00H to FEH 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
hexadecimal representation) of a module
(d1) If data is written to the automatic update buffer: Station 1 to 64 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
number of the target station
If data is written to the random access buffer: Specify 00FFH 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
the random access buffer.
(d2) Offset value from the start of the random access buffer 0 to parameter set 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
or automatic update buffer assigned to the target station value*1
(s) Start device for storing the data to be written  Device name ANY16*2
(n) Number of write points 1 to 4096 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
EN Execution condition  Bit BOOL
ENO Execution result  Bit BOOL

*1 Value that was set in the CC-Link Configuration window of the engineering tool.
*2 When specifying data with a label, define the array so that an area required for operation can be secured, and specify the array label
element.

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 51
■Applicable devices
Operand Bit Word Double word Indirect Constant Others
X, Y, M, L, J\ T, ST, C, D, W, U\G, Z LT, LST, LZ specification K, H E $ (U)
SM, F, B, SB, SD, SW, FD, R, J\, LC
FX, FY ZR, RD U3E\(H)G
(U)*1            
*2 *3
(d1)            
(d2) *2  *3         
(s)   *3         
(n) *2  *3         

*1 Index modification is not available.


*2 FX and FY cannot be used.
*3 FD cannot be used.

Processing details
• This instruction writes data to the automatic update buffer or random access buffer of the master station.
• The instruction can be executed, from the master station, for an intelligent device station that performs communications
with the automatic update buffer (e.g. AJ65BT-R2N).
• The following figure shows how the G(P).RITO instruction operates during execution.
[Own station] [Target station]
CC-Link intelligent device
CPU module CC-Link master station station

G(P).RITO

Buffer memory
Automatic update
buffer
(s) Automatic update
Communications
buffer memory
start when
Random access
conditions are
buffer
(d1) satisfied.
(d2)

 Data is read from the device specified by (s) and later of the master station.
 The read data is written to the automatic update buffer or random access buffer specified by (d1) and (d2).

Precautions
• Assignment of the automatic update buffer can be achieved by CC-Link configuration setting of the module parameters.

Operation error
Error code Description
(SD0)
4000H to 4FFFH  MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

APPENDICES
App. - 52 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
Appendix 4.7 RDMSG (Performing a message
transmission to a remote device station)

G(P).RDMSG

RnSFCPU RnSFCPU
RnCPU RnENCPU RnPCPU (Standard) (Safety)

This instruction reads/writes parameters from/to the remote device station and reads the status of the remote device station.
This instruction can be used for communications with a remote device station, for example NZ2AW1C2AL, that supports the
message transmission function.
Ladder ST
ENO:=G_RDMSG(EN,U,s1,s2,d1,d2);
ENO:=GP_RDMSG(EN,U,s1,s2,d1,d2);
(U) (s1) (s2) (d1) (d2)

FBD/LD

EN ENO

U d1

s1 d2

s2

■Execution condition
Instruction Execution condition
G.RDMSG
A
GP.RDMSG

Setting data
■Description, range, data type
Operand Description Range Data type Data type (label)
(U) Start I/O number (first three digits in four-digit 00H to FEH 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
hexadecimal representation) of a module
(s1) Start device where control data is stored Refer to the control data. Device name ANY16*2
*1
(s2) Start device for storing the message data to be sent  Device name ANY16*2
(d1)*1 Start device for storing the message data received  Device name ANY16
(d2) Device to be turned on one scan upon completion of  Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
the instruction (Number of elements: 2)
(d2)+1 also turns on when the instruction completes
with an error.
EN Execution condition  Bit BOOL
ENO Execution result  Bit BOOL

*1 For details on the send data and receive data, refer to the following.
*2  Manuals for the remote device stations that support the message transmission function
*3 When specifying data with a label, define the array so that an area required for operation can be secured, and specify the array label
element.

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 53
■Applicable devices
Operand Bit Word Double word Indirect Constant Others
X, Y, M, L, J\ T, ST, C, D, W, U\G, Z LT, LST, LZ specification K, H E $ (U)
SM, F, B, SB, SD, SW, FD, R, J\, LC
FX, FY ZR, RD U3E\(H)G
(U)*1            
(s1)            
(s2)            
(d1)            
(d2)            

*1 Index modification is not available.

■Control data
Operand: (s1)
Device Item Description Setting range Set by
+0 Completion status The instruction completion status is stored.  System
• 0: Completed successfully
• Other than 0: Completed with an error (error code)
+1 Station number Specify the station number of the target station. 1 to 64 User
+2 Send data size Specify the send message data size in bytes. 1 to 255 User
+3 Receivable data size Specify the maximum size of the device that stores the receive message data in 0 to 255 User
bytes.
+4 Receive data size The receive message data size is stored in bytes.  System

APPENDICES
App. - 54 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
Processing details
• This instruction performs a message transmission to a remote device station.
• The instruction can be executed to a remote device station, for example NZ2AW1C2AL, that supports the message
transmission function.
• The following figure shows how the G(P).RDMSG instruction operates during execution.
[Own station] [Target station]

CC-Link remote device


CPU module CC-Link master station station
G(P).RDMSG
(s2) Request
Send data
message

(d1) Response
Receive data message

 The send data specified by (s2) is stored to the master station for the size specified by (s1)+2.
 The master station sends data to the target station specified by (s1)+1.
 Processing is performed for the data in the target station specified by (s1)+1.
 The master station receives a processing result from the target station specified by (s1)+1.
 The master station stores data in the device specified by (d1) and later, and the device specified by (d2) turns on.
• Normal/error completion of the G(P).RDMSG instruction can be checked with the completion device specified by the setting
data (d2) and the completion status indication device (d2)+1.
• Completion device (d2)
This device turns on during END processing of the scan that arises upon completion of the G(P).RDMSG instruction, and turns off
during the next END processing.
• Completion status indication device (d2)+1 A
This device turns on or off depending on the status resulting from completion of the G(P).RDMSG instruction.
When completed successfully: The device remains off.
When completed with an error: The device turns on during END processing of the scan that arises upon completion of the G(P).RDMSG
instruction, and turns off during the next END processing.

Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END


Execution of Completion of
the instruction the instruction
G(P).RDMSG instruction

ON
Completion device (d2) OFF OFF
Completed
ON with an error
Completion status
indication device (d2)+1 OFF OFF
Completed
successfully
1 scan

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 55
■Send data size
CPU module CC-Link master station CC-Link remote device station

(s2)

Send data Request


Size message
specified
by (s1)+2

When the number of bytes in the send data ((s1)+2) is odd, the lower byte is sent as for the last data.
CPU module CC-Link master station CC-Link remote device station

(s2)

Send data Request


message

As for the last


data, only the
lower byte is sent.

APPENDICES
App. - 56 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
■Receivable data size and receive data size
Set the receivable data size ((s1)+3) so that it satisfies the following.
Receivable data size ((s1)+3)  Receive data size ((s1)+4)
CPU module CC-Link master station CC-Link remote device station

(d1)

Receive data Size Response


stored in message
(s1)+4
Size
specified
by (s1)+3

Data is not stored.

If the receivable data size ((s1)+3) is smaller than the receive data size ((s1)+4), the master station cannot receive data from
the remote device station. The G(P).RDMSG instruction completes with an error (error code: B418H).
• When the number of bytes in the receivable data ((s1)+3) is odd
If the receive data has the same number of bytes, 0 is stored in the upper byte of the last data.

CPU module CC-Link master station CC-Link remote device station

(d1)
In the upper byte
of the last data, 0 Receive data Response
is stored. message

• When the number of bytes in the receive data ((s1)+4) is odd


The last receive data is stored in the lower byte of the last data storage area in the device memory. In the upper byte of the
last data storage area, 0 is stored.

CPU module CC-Link master station CC-Link remote device station

(d1)
In the upper byte
of the last data, 0 Receive data Response
is stored. message

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 57
Precautions
• The G(P).RDMSG instruction can be simultaneously executed to two or more remote device stations (up to four stations).
Two or more dedicated instructions, including those other than this instruction, cannot be concurrently executed for a single
station. If the next dedicated instruction is issued before completion of the preceding one that has started, the instruction
will be completed with an error. Create the program so that the next dedicated instruction will start after the completion
device turns on, because processing of a dedicated instruction takes several scans until its completion.
• The G(P).RDMSG instruction uses a part or all of remote register that performs cyclic transmissions between the master
station and the target station in the system. For programming, refer to the manual for the remote device station targeted.
Add SW0160 to SW0163 (Remote register use prohibited status) in a program as an interlock.

Operation error
Error code Description
((s1)+0)
B000H to BFFFH  MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application)

APPENDICES
App. - 58 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
Appendix 4.8 RLPASET (Setting network parameters)

G(P).RLPASET

RnSFCPU RnSFCPU
RnCPU RnENCPU RnPCPU (Standard) (Safety)

This instruction sets network parameters in the master station and starts up the data link.
Ladder ST
ENO:=G_RLPASET(EN,U,s1,s2,s3,s4,s5,d);
ENO:=GP_RLPASET(EN,U,s1,s2,s3,s4,s5,d);
(U) (s1) (s2) (s3) (s4) (s5) (d)

FBD/LD

EN ENO

U d

s1

s2

s3

s4

s5

■Execution condition
Instruction Execution condition
G.RLPASET

A
GP.RLPASET

Setting data
■Description, range, data type
Operand Description Range Data type Data type (label)
(U) Start I/O number (first three digits in four-digit 00H to FEH 16-bit unsigned binary ANY16
hexadecimal representation) of a module
(s1) Start device where control data is stored Refer to the control data. Device name ANY16*1
*2
(s2) Start device containing the slave station setting data  Device name ANY16*1
*2
(s3) Start device containing the reserved station  Device name ANY16*1
specification data
(s4)*2 Start device containing the error invalid station  Device name ANY16*1
specification data
(s5)*2 Start device containing the automatic update buffer  Device name ANY16*1
assignment data
(d) Device to be turned on one scan upon completion of  Bit ANYBIT_ARRAY
the instruction (Number of elements: 2)
(d)+1 also turns on when the instruction completes with
an error.
EN Execution condition  Bit BOOL
ENO Execution result  Bit BOOL

*1 When specifying data with a label, define the array so that an area required for operation can be secured, and specify the array label
element.
*2 If this operand is omitted, specify the dummy device or label.

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 59
■Applicable devices
Operand Bit Word Double word Indirect Constant Others
X, Y, M, L, J\ T, ST, C, D, W, U\G, Z LT, LST, LZ specification K, H E $ (U)
SM, F, B, SB, SD, SW, FD, R, J\, LC
FX, FY ZR, RD U3E\(H)G
(U)*1            
*3
(s1)            
(s2)   *3         
(s3)   *3         
*3
(s4)            
(s5)   *3         
(d) *2  *4         

*1 Index modification is not available.


*2 FX and FY cannot be used.
*3 FD cannot be used.
*4 T, ST, C, and FD cannot be used.

■Control data
Operand: (s1)
Device Item Description Setting range Set by
+0 Completion status The instruction completion status is stored.  System
• 0: Completed successfully
• Other than 0: Completed with an error (error code)
+1 Setting flag Specify whether the setting data in (s2) to (s5) is valid/invalid.  User
• 0: Invalid*1
• 1: Valid
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 ••• b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0 (6) (5) 0 0 (4) (3) (2) (1)

(1) Slave station setting data (s2)


(2) Reserved station specification data (s3)
(3) Error invalid station specification data (s4)
(4) Automatic update buffer assignment data (s5)
(5) Data link faulty station setting
• 0: Data in the remote input (RX) is cleared.
• 1: Data in the remote input (RX) is held.
(6) CPU STOP time output setting
• 0: Data is refreshed to the remote output (RY).
• 1: Data, 0, is sent to the remote output (RY).
+2 Total number of connected Specify the number of slave stations to be connected. 1 to 64 User
stations
+3 Number of retries Specify the number of retries to be performed for a communication error station. 1 to 7 User
+4 Number of automatic return Specify the number of slave stations that can return by one link scan. 1 to 10 User
stations
+5 Data link setting when CPU Specify whether to stop or continue the data link when a stop error occurs in the 0, 1 User
is down CPU module.
• 0: (Data link stopped)
• 1: (Data link continued)
+6 Scan mode setting Specify whether the link scan is asynchronous or synchronous with the 0, 1 User
sequence scan. If it is synchronous, the output transmission delay time will
shorten.
• 0: (Asynchronous with a sequence scan)
• 1: (Synchronous with a sequence scan)

*1 The default value will be used for any setting data specified as invalid. For the default values, refer to the following.
Page App. - 61 Slave station setting data
Page App. - 61 Reserved station specification data
Page App. - 61 Error invalid station specification data
Page App. - 62 Automatic update buffer assignment data

APPENDICES
App. - 60 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
■Slave station setting data
Operand: (s2)
Device Item Description Setting range Set by
+0 to +63 Station information Specify the station number, the number of occupied stations, and the station type  User
settings*1 for each slave station.
b15 ••• b12 b11 ••• b8 b7 ••• b0
(3) (2) (1)

The default value range is 0101H to 0140H, meaning that the station number is 1 to
64, the number of occupied stations is 1 station occupied, and the station type is
Ver.1-compatible remote I/O station.
(1) Station number setting 01H to 40H User
1 to 64
(2) Number of occupied stations setting 1H to 4H User
• 1H: 1 station occupied
• 2H: 2 stations occupied
• 3H: 3 stations occupied
• 4H: 4 stations occupied
(3) Station type setting*2 0H to FH User
• 0H: Ver.1-compatible remote I/O station
• 1H: Ver.1-compatible remote device station
• 2H: Ver.1-compatible intelligent device station
• 5H: Ver.2-compatible remote device station (single)
• 6H: Ver.2-compatible intelligent device station (single)
• 8H: Ver.2-compatible remote device station (double)
• 9H: Ver.2-compatible intelligent device station (double)
• BH: Ver.2-compatible remote device station (quadruple)
• CH: Ver.2-compatible intelligent device station (quadruple)
• EH: Ver.2-compatible remote device station (octuple)
• FH: Ver.2-compatible intelligent device station (octuple)

*1 Repeat this setting for the total number of connected stations.


*2 If a local station is specified, specify the intelligent device station.

■Reserved station specification data


Operand: (s3) A
Device Item Description Setting range Set by
+0 to +3 Reserved station Specify a reserved station for each station.*1  User
specification • 0: Not specified
• 1: Specified
b15 b14 b13 b12 ••• b3 b2 b1 b0
(s3)+0 16 15 14 13 ••• 4 3 2 1

(s3)+1 32 31 30 29 ••• 20 19 18 17

(s3)+2 48 47 46 45 ••• 36 35 34 33

(s3)+3 64 63 62 61 ••• 52 51 50 49

The default value is "0: Not specified" for all stations.

*1 For two or more stations occupied, specify only the slave station start number.

■Error invalid station specification data


Operand: (s4)
Device Item Description Setting range Set by
+0 to +3 Error invalid station Specify an error invalid station for each station.*1*2  User
specification • 0: Not specified
• 1: Specified
b15 b14 b13 b12 ••• b3 b2 b1 b0
(s4)+0 16 15 14 13 ••• 4 3 2 1

(s4)+1 32 31 30 29 ••• 20 19 18 17

(s4)+2 48 47 46 45 ••• 36 35 34 33

(s4)+3 64 63 62 61 ••• 52 51 50 49

The default value is "0: Not specified" for all stations.

*1 For two or more stations occupied, specify only the slave station start number.
*2 If both the reserved and error invalid stations are specified for the same station, the reserved station specification will take priority.

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 61
■Automatic update buffer assignment data
Operand: (s5)
Device Item Description Setting range Set by
+0 to +77 Automatic update buffer Specify the assigned buffer memory size (words) that is used for the transient 0H (no setting), User
assignment specification transmission with the automatic update buffer that is performed to the local or 0080H to
intelligent device station.*1 1000H*2
• 0: Not specified
• 1: Specified

(s5)+0 Dummy
Dummy For the 1st
(s5)+1
module
(s5)+2 Automatic update buffer size

(s5)+75 Dummy
For the 26th
(s5)+76 Dummy
module
(s5)+77 Automatic update buffer size

The default value is 0080H.

*1 Beginning at the smallest station number, set the size for the slave stations for which the local or intelligent device station has been set
with the slave station setting data ((s2)+0 to (s2)+63).
*2 The automatic update buffer size must be 1000H (4096) words or less in total. For the automatic update buffer size, specify the required
size for each intelligent device station.

Processing details
• This instruction sets network parameters in the master station and starts up the data link.
• This instruction can be executed only for the master station.
• The following figure shows how the G(P).RLPASET instruction operates during execution.

CPU module CC-Link master station


G(P).RLPASET
(d)

Module
parameter

 The network parameters specified by (s1) to (s5) are written to the master station.
 The data link is started up.
 The device specified by (d) is turned on.
• Normal/error completion of the G(P).RLPASET instruction can be checked with the completion device specified by the
setting data (d) and the completion status indication device (d)+1.
• Completion device (d)
This device turns on during END processing of the scan that arises upon completion of the G(P).RLPASET instruction, and turns off
during the next END processing.
• Completion status indication device (d)+1
This device turns on or off depending on the status resulting from completion of the G(P).RLPASET instruction.
When completed successfully: The device remains off.
When completed with an error: The device turns on during END processing of the scan that arises upon completion of the
G(P).RLPASET instruction, and turns off during the next END processing.

APPENDICES
App. - 62 Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions
• After completion of the G(P).RLPASET instruction, turn on SB0003, a refresh instruction that is used for parameter change
with the dedicated instruction, to start the cyclic data refresh.
• If no stations are faulty
Sequence scan END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0

Refresh stop Refresh start


Data link stop Data link start
Completion of
the instruction
Own station data link status
(X01)
Refresh instruction when
changing parameters with the
dedicated instruction
(SB0003)
Data link stop (SB0002)

Data link stop completion


(SB0045)

G(P).RLPASET instruction
ON
Completion device (d) OFF
ON Completed with an error
Completion status indication OFF
device (d)+1 Completed
successfully
1 scan

• If all stations are faulty


Sequence scan END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0

Refresh stop Refresh start


Data link stop Return processing Data link start
Completion of the
instruction
Own station data link status
(X01)
Refresh instruction when
changing parameters with
the dedicated instruction
(SB0003)
Data link stop (SB0002)

Data link stop completion


A
(SB0045)

G(P).RLPASET instruction
ON
Completion device (d) OFF
ON Completed with an error
Completion status indication
device (d)+1 OFF
Completed
successfully
1 scan Modules
return to the
system.

Precautions
• Two or more G(P).RLPASET instructions cannot be executed concurrently.
• The G(P).RLPASET instruction is not available in a system containing a standby master station.
• Do not set network parameters using the engineering tool for modules for which network parameters are set using the
G(P).RLPASET instruction. If the G(P).RLPASET instruction is executed for a module for which network parameters are set
using the engineering tool, the instruction will be terminated with an error and the network parameter settings are not
reflected.
• Stop the data link using "Data Link Stop" (SB0002) before executing the G(P).RLPASET instruction.

Operation error
Error code Description
((s1)+0)
B000H to BFFFH  MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application)

APPENDICES
Appendix 4 Dedicated Instructions App. - 63
Appendix 5 Precautions for Creating Programs

Interlock program
When creating a cyclic transmission program, provide an interlock circuit with 'Data link status of other stations' (SW0080 to
SW0083).

Ex.
Devices used in the program example
Device Description
X0 Module failure
X1 Own station data link status
XF Module ready
SW0080.0 Data link status of other stations (station No.1)
SW0080.1 Data link status of other stations (station No.2)

Program for communications with the station No.1

Program for communications with the station No.2

APPENDICES
App. - 64 Appendix 5 Precautions for Creating Programs
Appendix 6 List of I/O Signals and Remote Register
Assignment of the AJ65BT-64AD
List of I/O signals
The AJ65BT-64AD uses 32 inputs and 32 outputs for data communications with the master module.

Signal direction: AJ65BT-64AD → Master module Signal direction: Master module → AJ65BT-64AD
Device No. Signal name Device No. Signal name
RXn0 CH1 A/D conversion completed flag RYn0 Offset/gain value selection
RXn1 CH2 A/D conversion completed flag RYn1 Voltage/current selection
RXn2 CH3 A/D conversion completed flag RYn4 Use prohibited

RXn3 CH4 A/D conversion completed flag
RY(n+1)7
RXn4 Use prohibited

RX(n+1)7
RX(n+1)8 Initial data processing request flag RY(n+1)8 Initial data processing complete flag
RX(n+1)9 Initial data setting complete flag RY(n+1)9 Initial data setting request flag
RX(n+1)A Error flag RY(n+1)A Error reset request flag
RX(n+1)B Remote READY RY(n+1)B Use prohibited

RX(n+1)C Use prohibited
RY(n+1)F

RX(n+1)F

n: Address assigned by the master module with the station No. setting

If a "Use prohibited" device is turned on or off in a sequence program, the functions of the AJ65BT-64AD
cannot be guaranteed.
] A

APPENDICES
Appendix 6 List of I/O Signals and Remote Register Assignment of the AJ65BT-64AD App. - 65
Remote register assignment

Signal direction Address Description Default


Master → Remote RWwm Averaging process setting 0
RWwm+1 CH1 Time Average/Count Average 0
RWwm+2 CH2 Time Average/Count Average
RWwm+3 CH3 Time Average/Count Average
RWwm+4 CH4 Time Average/Count Average
RWwm+5 Data format 0
RWwm+6 A/D conversion enable/disable setting 0
RWwm+7 Use prohibited 
Remote → Master RWrn CH1 Digital output value 0
RWrn+1 CH2 Digital output value
RWrn+2 CH3 Digital output value
RWrn+3 CH4 Digital output value
RWrn+4 Error code 0
RWrn+5 Use prohibited 
RWrn+6
RWrn+7

m, n: Address assigned by the master module with the station No. setting

Do not read/write data from/to the use prohibited remote register areas. Otherwise, the functions of the
AJ65BT-64AD cannot be guaranteed.

APPENDICES
App. - 66 Appendix 6 List of I/O Signals and Remote Register Assignment of the AJ65BT-64AD
Appendix 7 List of I/O Signals and Remote Register
Assignment of the AJ65BT-64DAV
List of I/O signals
The AJ65BT-64DAV uses 32 inputs and 32 outputs for data communications with the master station.

Signal direction: AJ65BT-64DAV → Master station Signal direction: Master station → AJ65BT-64DAV
Device No. Signal name Device No. Signal name
RXn0 Use prohibited RYn0 CH1 Analog output enable/disable
 flag
RXnF
RYn1 CH2 Analog output enable/disable
flag
RYn2 CH3 Analog output enable/disable
flag
RYn3 CH4 Analog output enable/disable
flag
RYn4 Offset/gain value selection
RYn5 Use prohibited

RYnF
RX(n+1)0 Use prohibited RY(n+1)0 Use prohibited
 
RX(n+1)7 RY(n+1)7
RX(n+1)8 Initial data processing request flag RY(n+1)8 Initial data processing complete flag
RX(n+1)9 Initial data setting complete flag RY(n+1)9 Initial data setting request flag
RX(n+1)A Error flag RY(n+1)A Error reset request flag
RX(n+1)B Remote READY RY(n+1)B Use prohibited
RX(n+1)C Use prohibited RY(n+1)C
A
RX(n+1)D RY(n+1)D
RX(n+1)E RY(n+1)E
RX(n+1)F RY(n+1)F

n: Address assigned by the master station with the station No. setting

If a "Use prohibited" device is turned on or off in a sequence program, the functions of the AJ65BT-64DAV
cannot be guaranteed.

APPENDICES
Appendix 7 List of I/O Signals and Remote Register Assignment of the AJ65BT-64DAV App. - 67
Remote register assignment

Signal direction Address Description Default


Master → Remote RWwm CH1 Digital value setting area 0
RWwm+1 CH2 Digital value setting area 0
RWwm+2 CH3 Digital value setting area 0
RWwm+3 CH4 Digital value setting area 0
RWwm+4 Analog output enable/disable setting area 0
RWwm+5 Use prohibited
RWwm+6
RWwm+7
Remote → Master RWrn CH1 Setting value check code 0
RWrn+1 CH2 Setting value check code 0
RWrn+2 CH3 Setting value check code 0
RWrn+3 CH4 Setting value check code 0
RWrn+4 Error code 0
RWrn+5 Use prohibited
RWrn+6
RWrn+7

m, n: Address assigned by the master station with the station No. setting

Do not read/write data from/to the use prohibited remote register areas. Otherwise, the functions of the
AJ65BT-64DAV cannot be guaranteed.

APPENDICES
App. - 68 Appendix 7 List of I/O Signals and Remote Register Assignment of the AJ65BT-64DAV
Appendix 8 List of I/O Signals and Remote Register
Assignment of the FR-E520-0.1KN
List of I/O signals

Signal direction: FR-E520-0.1KN → Master Signal direction: Master → FR-E520-0.1KN


Device No. (input) Signal name Device No. (output) Signal name
RXn0 Forward running RYn0 Forward run command (STF)
RXn1 Reverse running RYn1 Reverse run command (STR)
*2
RXn2 Running (RUN) RYn2 RH terminal function*1
RXn3 Up to frequency (SU) RYn3 RM terminal function*1
RXn4 Overload (OL) RYn4 RL terminal function*1
RXn5 Unused (Reserved for the system) RYn5 Unused (Reserved for the system)*3
*2
RXn6 Frequency detection (FU) RYn6
RXn7 Fault (ABC)*2 RYn7
RXn8 Unused (Reserved for the system) RYn8
RXn9 RYn9 Output stop*1
RXnA RYnA Unused (Reserved for the system)*3
RXnB RYnB
RXnC Monitoring RYnC Monitor command
RXnD Frequency setting completed (RAM) RYnD Frequency setting command (RAM)
RXnE Frequency setting completed (E2PROM) RYnE Frequency setting command (E2PROM)
RXnF Instruction code execution completed RYnF Instruction code execution request
RX(n+1)0 Unused (Reserved for the system) RY(n+1)0 Unused (Reserved for the system)*3
RX(n+1)1 RY(n+1)1
RX(n+1)2 RY(n+1)2 A
RX(n+1)3 RY(n+1)3
RX(n+1)4 RY(n+1)4
RX(n+1)5 RY(n+1)5
RX(n+1)6 RY(n+1)6
RX(n+1)7 RY(n+1)7
RX(n+1)8 RY(n+1)8
RX(n+1)9 RY(n+1)9
RX(n+1)A Error flag RY(n+1)A Error reset request flag
RX(n+1)B Remote READY RY(n+1)B Unused (Reserved for the system)*3
RX(n+1)C Unused (Reserved for the system) RY(n+1)C
RX(n+1)D RY(n+1)D
RX(n+1)E RY(n+1)E
RX(n+1)F RY(n+1)F

n: Address assigned by the master station with the station No. setting

*1 With Pr.180 to Pr.183 (input terminal (remote output) signal function selection), the function of the signal can be changed. (However, for
some functions, commands cannot be turned on or off from CC-Link.)
*2 With Pr.190 to Pr.192 (output terminal (remote input) function selection), output contents can be changed.
*3 Unused output signals need to be off (Enter 0.).

If unused (reserved for the system) devices are turned on or off in a sequence program, the functions of the
FR-E520-0.1KN cannot be guaranteed.

APPENDICES
Appendix 8 List of I/O Signals and Remote Register Assignment of the FR-E520-0.1KN App. - 69
Remote register assignment

Signal direction Address Signal name Description


Master → Remote RWwm Monitor code Set the monitor code to be referenced. By turning on the RYC signal after setting, the specified
monitored data is set to RWrn.
RWwm+1 Set frequency Specify the set frequency.
At this time, whether it is written to RAM or E2PROM is differentiated by the RYD and RYE signals.
After setting the frequency to this register, turn on the RYD or RYE to write the frequency.
On completion of frequency write, RXD or RXE turns on in response to the input command.
RWwm+2 Instruction code Set the instruction code for execution of operation mode rewrite, Pr. Read/write, error reference, error
clear, and others.
The corresponding instruction is executed by turning on RYF after completion of register setting.
RXF turns on upon completion of instruction execution.
RWwm+3 Write data Set the data specified by the above instruction code if required.
Turn on RYF after setting the above instruction code and this register.
Set zero when the write code is not required.
Remote → Master RWrn Monitored value The monitored value specified by RWwm (monitor code) is set.
RWrn+1 Output The present output frequency is always set.
frequency
RWrn+2 Reply code The reply code corresponding to RWm+2 (instruction code) is set.
0 is set for a normal reply and a value other than 0 is set for a data error.
RWrn+3 Read data For a normal reply, the reply data to the instruction specified by the instruction code is set.

m, n: Address assigned by the master station with the station No. setting

APPENDICES
App. - 70 Appendix 8 List of I/O Signals and Remote Register Assignment of the FR-E520-0.1KN
Appendix 9 Exercise 5 (Connecting an Inverter)
In this exercise, set parameters for the CC-Link type inverter via CC-Link and operate the system.

Appendix 9.1 System configuration


The following figure shows the system configuration of the demonstration machine for Exercise 5.

Station No.: 0
Master (RJ61BT11)
Inverter
Demonstration machine (Remote device station) Station No.:1
FR-E520-0.1KN

R61P R08 R60 R60


Empty

CPU AD4 DA4

Ethernet cable CC-Link dedicated cable


Terminating Terminating
resistor resistor

GOT2000

The CC-Link type inverter is handled as a remote device station.

APPENDICES
Appendix 9 Exercise 5 (Connecting an Inverter) App. - 71
Appendix 9.2 Setting and connecting the inverter
This section describes how to set and connect the general-purpose inverter (FR-E520-0.1KN) through CC-Link connection.

Setting the inverter


The following figure shows the settings of the FR-E520-0.1KN.
For details on the functions and specifications, refer to the manual for the inverter used.

Set "0".
Station No.: 1
Set "1".

Set "0". CC-Link transmission speed


Set the same transmission speed as that
of the master module.
(In this example, set 0: 156K.)

Connecting the inverter


The following figure shows the connections of CC-Link dedicated cables and terminating resistors.
Use connected wires to the three-phase 200V power supply.
Before connecting CC-Link dedicated cables and wiring the power supply, always shut off the power supply.
Inverter
Master module (RJ61BT11) Terminating (FR-E520-0.1KN)
Terminating resistor
NC resistor DA
NC
DA DB
SLD
DB DG
FG
DG SLD

FG

CC-Link dedicated cable

APPENDICES
App. - 72 Appendix 9 Exercise 5 (Connecting an Inverter)
Appendix 9.3 Parameter settings
Set parameters of the master station.
After setting, write the parameters to the CPU module.
For how to write parameters, refer to Page 3 - 25 Writing parameters.

Parameter settings (master station)


Set parameters of the master station.
For how to set parameters, refer to Page 3 - 18 Parameter settings (master station).

Operating procedure
1. In the "CC-Link Configuration" dialog box, drag
and drop the following modules from "Module
List" to the list of stations or the network map.

"General CC-Link Module"


"General Remote Device Station"

1. Set!

2. Set the link refresh parameters as shown on A


the left.

2. Set!

(To the next page)

APPENDICES
Appendix 9 Exercise 5 (Connecting an Inverter) App. - 73
(From the previous page)

3. Click the [Apply] button to close the


"RJ61BT11 Module Parameter" dialog box.

3. Click!

APPENDICES
App. - 74 Appendix 9 Exercise 5 (Connecting an Inverter)
Appendix 9.4 Setting parameters of the inverter
Set all the required parameters of the inverter before operation.
The remote output (RY) and remote register (RWw) can be used to set the parameters of the CC-Link type inverter.
The following figure shows the overview of parameter settings via CC-Link.
For the I/O signals and remote register areas of the inverter FR-E500-0.1KN, refer to Page App. - 69 List of I/O Signals and
Remote Register Assignment of the FR-E520-0.1KN.
For how to set the parameters with a parameter unit and details on each parameter, refer to the instruction manual for the
inverter.
CPU module Master station CC-Link type inverter

Instruction
RWw2 Instruction code
code
1) 2)
RWw3 Write data Write data

RYF ON

3)

5) 4)
RXF ON Parameter setting

1) Set an instruction code and write data in the remote register with sequence programs and turn on the instruction code
execution request signal (RYF).
2) The data is sent to the inverter by the data link.
3) Change the corresponding parameter value according to the instruction code.
4) Turn on the instruction code execution completed signal (RXF) at completion of writing.
5) Check the completion of writing with the instruction code execution completed signal.
A
*1 The instruction code depends on what needs to be executed by the inverter.
<Example> Operation mode writing code: FBH
Pr.4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) writing code: 84H

APPENDICES
Appendix 9 Exercise 5 (Connecting an Inverter) App. - 75
Appendix 9.5 Creating a sequence program

Refresh device assignment


The following figure shows the refresh relationship among the CPU module, buffer memory of the master station, and remote
device stations.

■Remote input (RX) and remote output (RY)


Remote device station (station No.1)
CPU module Master station FR-E520-0.1KN
Devices Buffer memory
Remote input (RX) Remote input (RX)
X20F to X200 E0H RX0F to RX00
X21F to X210 E1H RX1F to RX10
E2H
to
15FH
Remote output (RY)
RY0F to RY00
RY1F to RY10
Remote output (RY)
Y20F to Y200 160H
Y21F to Y210 161H
162H
to

1DFH

■Remote register (RWw, RWr)


Remote device station (station No.1)
CPU module Master station FR-E520-0.1KN
Devices Buffer memory

Remote register (RWw) Remote register (RWw)


D1000 1E0H Monitor code Monitor code
D1001 1E1H Set frequency Set frequency
D1002 1E2H Instruction code Instruction code
D1003 1E3H Write data Write data
1E4H
to
Remote register (RWr)
2DFH Monitored value
Output frequency
Reply code
Read data

Remote register (RWr)


D1100 2E0H Monitored value
D1101 2E1H Output frequency
D1102 2E2H Reply code
D1103 2E3H Read data
2E4H

to

3DFH

APPENDICES
App. - 76 Appendix 9 Exercise 5 (Connecting an Inverter)
Setting sheet
■Station information setting sheet
Station Station type No. of Reserved/invalid station Intelligent buffer specification (word)
No. occupied specification Send Receive Automatic
stations update
1 Intelligent device station 1 No setting   

■Device assignment table


Station Device
No. RX → (X) RY ← (Y) RWw → (D) RWr ← (D)
Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side Remote side CPU side
1 0000 to 000F 00200 to 0020F 0000 to 000F 00200 to 0020F 0000 to 0003 1000 to 1003 0000 to 0003 1100 to 1103
0010 to 001F 00210 to 0021F 0010 to 001F 00210 to 0021F

APPENDICES
Appendix 9 Exercise 5 (Connecting an Inverter) App. - 77
Sequence program
Create the following sequence program and write it to the CPU module.
Project name EX5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
X30 X3F X31 SW80.0
N0 M800
1 (0) Module Module Own Data link MC
failure ready station status of
data link other
status stations
SM413 Y170

Flash this
2 2 second device when
the own station
clock data link is
normally
operating.

N0 M800

4 *Check other stations and display output frequency.


SM400 SW80.0 Y171

5 (8) Always On Data link Display a


status of station
other No.1 error.
stations

D1101 D1
6 MOV

7 *Control program
X21B X200 X201 M0

8 (16) Remote Forward Reverse


ready running running

SW80.0 M0 M1 M5 Y20F X20F


H84 D1002
Instruction
9 (21) Data link Instruction Instruction MOV code
status of code code
other execution execution
stations request completed

K4000 D1003
Write data
10 MOV

Y20F
Instruction
11 SET code
execution
request

M1
12 SET

13 *Operation mode change


SW80.0 M0 M1 M5 Y20F X20F
Y20F
Instruction
14 (33) Data link Instruction Instruction RST code
status of code code execution
other execution execution request
stations request completed
Y20F X20F
H0FB D1002
Instruction
15 Instruction Instruction MOV code
code code
execution execution
request completed

APPENDICES
App. - 78 Appendix 9 Exercise 5 (Connecting an Inverter)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

H0 D1003
Write data
16 MOV

Y20F
Instruction
17 SET code
execution
request

M1
18 RST

M5
19 SET

SW80.0 M0 M5 M10 Y20F X20F


Y20F
Instruction
20 (52) Data link Initial Instruction Instruction RST code
status of setting code code execution
other completed execution execution request
stations flag request completed
Y20F X20F
M10
Initial
21 Instruction Instruction SET setting
code code completed
execution execution flag
request completed
22 *Write the set frequency.
SW80.0 M0 M10 M11 M20
K2000 D1001
Set
23 (64) Data link Initial MOV frequency
status of setting
other completed
stations flag

Y20D
Frequency
24 SET setting
command
(RAM) A
M11
25 SET

SW80.0 M11 M20 Y20D X20D


Y20D
Frequency
26 (74) Data link Frequency Frequency RST setting
status of setting setting command
other command completed (RAM)
stations (RAM) (RAM)

M11
27 RST

M20
28 SET

29 *Forward/reverse run command


SW80.0 M20 X102 X103 X201 Y200

30 (82) Data link Forward Reverse Reverse Forward


status of run run running run
other command command command
stations (STF)

APPENDICES
Appendix 9 Exercise 5 (Connecting an Inverter) App. - 79
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
X102 X103 X200 Y201

31 Forward Reverse Forward Reverse


run run running run
command command command
(STR)
32 *Output stop
X101 X202 X200
Y209
Output
33 (95) Stop Running Forward SET stop
command (RUN) running

X201

34 Reverse
running

X202 X200 X201 Y200 Y201


Y209
Output
35 (102) Running Forward Reverse Forward Reverse RST stop
(RUN) running running run run
command command
(STF) (STR)
36 *Multi-speed setting
SW80.0 M20 X104 X105 Y203

37 (108) Data link Multi- Multi- RM


status of speed speed terminal
other setting 1 setting 2 function
stations
X104 X105 Y202

38 Multi- Multi- RH
speed speed terminal
setting 1 setting 2 function

X104 X105 Y204

39 Multi- Multi- RL
speed speed terminal
setting 1 setting 2 function

40 *Error detection
X21A
M40
41 (123) Error flag PLS

M40
H74 D1002
Instruction
42 (127) MOV code

Y20F
Instruction
43 SET code
execution
request

Y176
44 SET

Y176 Y20F X20F


Y20F
Instruction
45 (132) Instruction Instruction RST code
code code execution
execution execution request
request completed

APPENDICES
App. - 80 Appendix 9 Exercise 5 (Connecting an Inverter)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

M41
46 SET

47 *Error reset request


M41 X21A X100
Y21A
Error reset
48 (137) Error flag Error reset SET request
request flag

Y21A X21A
Y21A
Error reset
49 (142) Error reset Error flag RST request
request flag
flag

Y176
50 RST

M41
51 RST

N0
52 (147) MCR

END

53 (148)

APPENDICES
Appendix 9 Exercise 5 (Connecting an Inverter) App. - 81
Appendix 9.6 Communications with the inverter
Switch operation of the demonstration machine
 Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module to the RESET position (for approximately one second) to reset the
CPU module.

 Set the RUN/STOP/RESET switch of the CPU module to the RUN position.
Y170 flashes depending on the own station data link status (X0A1) (Data link normal).
Y176 turns on due to an error in the inverter.
(An error occurs in the inverter by resetting the CPU module.)

 Turn on X100. (Inverter error reset request)


Y176 turns off. (Station No.1: Normal)

 Turn on X102.
Forward run starts at the set frequency (20.00Hz) of E2PROM.
D1 digital display displays "2000" (output frequency).

 Turn on X104. (X102 is on, X103 is off, X104 is on, and X105 is off.)
Forward running at the frequency of the initial value of the parameter (multi-speed setting (middle speed)) (30.00Hz)
D1 digital display displays "3000" (output frequency).

 Turn on X105. (X102 is on, X103 is off, X104 is on, and X105 is on.)
Forward running at the frequency written in the parameter (multi-speed setting (high speed)) (40.00Hz)
D1 digital display displays "4000" (output frequency).

 Turn off X104. (X102 is on, X103 is off, X104 is off, and X105 is on.)
Forward running at the frequency of the initial value of the parameter (multi-speed setting (low speed)) (10.00Hz)

 Turn on X101.
The frequency output of the inverter stops.
(The motor coasts to a stop.)
* To decelerate the motor to stop, turn off X102 (Forward run command) and X103 (Reverse run command).

APPENDICES
App. - 82 Appendix 9 Exercise 5 (Connecting an Inverter)
Appendix 10 Standby Master Function
If the master station goes down due to an error in a CPU module, power supply, or others, switching the control to the standby
master station (a backup station for the master station) continues data link. This function is used not to stop the entire system
even if the master station goes down.

Type
The standby master function can be categorized into three types as listed below.
: Enabled, : Disabled
Function When the master When a failed master When only a standby Setting of "Station Type" in
station goes down, the station becomes normal master station is started the module parameters
standby master station again, it returns in case up, it starts data link. Master Standby
continues data link. of the standby master station master
station going down. station
Master station   *1 Master station Standby master
switching function station
Master station duplex   *1 Master station Standby master
function (duplex station
function)
Data link startup by    Master station Master station
standby master (duplex (duplex
station*2 function) function)

*1 A standby master station does not start data link until the master station starts up.
*2 Set the same system for the master station and standby master station (same modules connected, module parameters, and program).

Operation
For the operation of the standby master function, refer to 1 - 3 Page (10) Standby master function.

Setting method
A
Set the standby master function in the module parameters of the engineering tool.
For details, refer to the following.
 MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (Application)

(1) Setting of the master station


Set "Station Type" in the module parameters.
When the failed master station returns: Master station (duplex function)
When the failed master station does not return: Master station

APPENDICES
Appendix 10 Standby Master Function App. - 83
(2) Setting of the standby master station
Set "Station Type" to "Standby Master Station" in the module parameters.
Set "Mode" according to the mode setting of the master station.

Precautions
(1) The number of standby master stations
One standby master station can be connected in one system.

(2) Data link control of a standby master station


When a master station goes down, data link control is automatically transferred to a standby master station. Note that an
instruction to refresh cyclic data is not issued. Use the link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW) to issue a
refresh instruction.
After the instruction is issued, information before a master station error is detected is output to each station.

(3) Change in the module parameter settings of the master station


While data link is performed by a standby master station, the module parameter settings of the master station cannot be
changed.

(4) Station number setting for a standby master station


If the station number of the standby mater station differs from that set in "Standby master station number" of the module
parameter for the master station, an error (error code: B39A) occurs in the standby master station. If an error has
occurred, reset the CPU module of the standby master station after changing the module parameter settings of the
master station or changing the station number of the standby master station.

(5) If the terminal block of the master station is removed while the master station is controlling data link
If the terminal block of the master station is removed without powering off the master station and reconnected, both of the
master station and standby master station will perform master operation because the right of controlling data link is
transferred to the standby master station; therefore, communications cannot be normally performed.
By powering off the master station and reconnecting the terminal block and powering on the master station, the master
station is reconnected as standby master station operation; therefore, communications can be normally performed.

(6) The status of an LED when data link control is transferred to a standby master station
When the master station goes down and the standby master station starts to take in control of data link, the ERR. LED on
the standby master station flashes. The station number of the standby master station is changed from the one set in the
module parameters to the station number 0, and the standby master station is regarded that it is not connected. Data link
is normally performed.
To prevent this situation, set the standby master station as an error invalid station.

APPENDICES
App. - 84 Appendix 10 Standby Master Function
(7) Number of points and range of devices to save data using a program
The points and range of devices where data from a master station (station operating as a master station) to a standby
master station (station operating as a standby master station) are saved using a program vary depending on the system.

(8) If an error is detected in the master station in the initial status (before data link is started)
Data link control is not switched to the standby master station and data link is not started. (This applies only to the master
station switching function and master station duplex function.)

(9) When the data link startup by standby master station is used
• Parameters and program set in the master station and standby master station
Set the same module parameters and program in the master station and standby master station. If not, the operation is
not guaranteed.
• Line test
When the data link startup by standby master station is used, a line test cannot be executed using the mode setting. Use
an engineering tool to execute a line test.

(10) Processing that sets the link devices saved at master switching and refresh instruction at standby master switching
After saving the link devices, wait a fixed number of scans and execute the processing that sets the link devices saved at
master switching and 'Refresh instruction at standby master switching' (SB0001).
The number of scans for waiting after saving the link devices differs depending on the mode setting. Use the following
values.

Mode setting Number of scans for Remarks


waiting
• Remote net Ver.1 mode Fixed to 0 
• Remote device net Ver.1
mode
• Remote I/O net mode
• Remote net Ver.2 mode (Link scan time ÷ Sequence • For link scan time, use the maximum value after master switching.
• Remote device net Ver.2 scan time) (Rounded up to • For sequence scan time, use the minimum value after master switching.
mode the nearest integer) × 4 A

APPENDICES
Appendix 10 Standby Master Function App. - 85
MEMO

APPENDICES
App. - 86 Appendix 10 Standby Master Function
Mitsubishi Programmable Controllers Training Manual
CC-Link (for GX Works3)

MODEL

MODEL
CODE

SH(NA)081676ENG-A (1711) MEE

HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN

When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

You might also like